This is an HTML version of an attachment to the Freedom of Information request 'Request for Stores and Procurement Regulations'.

物料供應及採購規例
STORES AND PROCUREMENT 
REGULATIONS 
香 港 特 別 行 政 區
政 府 規 例 ( 卷 四 ) 
REGULATIONS OF THE 
GOVERNMENT OF THE HONG KONG 
SPECIAL ADMINISTRATIVE 
REGION 
VOLUME 4 

STORES AND PROCUREMENT REGULATIONS 
 
TABLE OF CONTENTS 
 
Introduction (1-16) 
 
C h a p t e r   I  
 Authority, Policy and Responsibility (100-160) 
 
 
Authority for Making Stores and Procurement Regulations  100 
(SPRs) ..........................................................................................
 
Applicability ................................................................................ 105 
 
Procurement Policy and Principles .............................................. 106-109 
 
Responsibilities of Public Officers .............................................. 110-115 
 
Authority and Responsibilities of the Tender Boards/ 116 
Committees and Consultants Selection Boards/ Committees 
 
Authority and Responsibilities of the Director of Government  120 
Logistics .......................................................................................
 
Authority and Responsibilities of Controlling Officers .............. 125-135 
 
Handling of Complaints ............................................................... 160 
 
 
 
Chapter IA  
Avoiding and Managing Conflict of Interest in  
Government Procurement (180-198) 

 
General and Applicability ............................................................ 180 
 
Avoiding and Managing Conflicts with Private Interests ........... 185-188 
 
Avoiding and Managing Conflicts that may arise from the  190-198 
Different Roles of Consulting Firms/Contractors ........................
 
 
 
Chapter II  Procurement of Stores, Services and Revenue Contracts   
(200-298) 
 
General ......................................................................................... 200-217 
 
Types of Procurement Procedures ............................................... 220-222 
 
Procurement of Stores through the Government Logistics  235 
Department ..................................................................................
 
Procurement of Stores by Departments ....................................... 245-265 
 
Procurement of Services by Departments .................................... 280-290 
 
Procurement of Revenue Contracts by Departments ................... 295 
 
Quotation Negotiations ................................................................ 296 
 
Cancellation of Quotation Exercise ............................................. 297 

 
Exceptional Authorisation ........................................................... 298 
 
 
 
Chapter III  Tender Procedures (300-390) 
 
 
Scope and Coverage .................................................................... 300 
 
Classification of Information ....................................................... 305 
 
Tender Boards and Other Approving Authorities ....................... 310 
 
Types of Tendering ...................................................................... 315-330 
 
Direct Engagement ...................................................................... 331-333 
 
Funding ........................................................................................ 337-338 
 
Tender Notices and Tendering Period ......................................... 340 
 
Tender Documents ....................................................................... 345 
 
Access to Tender Information ..................................................... 346-349 
 
Tender Specifications .................................................................. 350 
 
Tenders in Foreign Currencies ..................................................... 355 
 
Tender Deposits/ Bonds ............................................................... 360 
 
Contract Deposits/Performance Bonds ........................................ 361-362 
 
Retention Moneys ........................................................................ 363 
 
Receipt and Clarification of Tenders ........................................... 365 
 
Evaluation of Tenders .................................................................. 370 
 
Tender Reports ............................................................................. 375 
 
Cancellation of a Tender Exercise or Concluding a Service  380 
Level Agreement with a Trading Fund Department ....................
 
Tender Negotiations ..................................................................... 385 
 
Acceptance of Tenders and Awards of Contracts ........................ 390 
 
 
 
Chapter IV  Consultants Selection Procedures (400-470) 
 
 
Applicability, Scope and Coverage ............................................. 400-405 
 
Approving Authority ................................................................... 410-416 
 
Classification of Information ....................................................... 420 
 
Consultants Selection Boards and Committees ........................... 425-427 
 
The Central Consultants Selection Board Procedures ................. 430-460 
 
Remuneration of Consultants ...................................................... 465 
 
Cancellation of a Consultants Selection Exercise  ...................... 470 
 
 
 
Chapter V  Contract Administration (500-541) 
 
 
Applicability ................................................................................ 500 

 
Execution of Contracts ................................................................ 505-510 
 
Contract Payments ....................................................................... 515 
 
Variations to Contracts ................................................................ 520 
 
Contract Negotiations .................................................................. 525 
 
Disposal of Contract Documents ................................................. 530 
 
Monitoring of Performance of Contractors and Consultants ....... 535-541 
 
 
 
Chapter VI  Stores Records (600-680) 
 
 
General ......................................................................................... 600-605 
 
Ledgers ........................................................................................ 610-635 
 
Vouchers and Forms .................................................................... 650-675 
 
Registers ...................................................................................... 680 
 
 
 
Chapter VII  Accounting for Stores (700-775) 
 
 
Classification of Stores ................................................................ 700-710 
 
Accounting for General Inventory Items ..................................... 715-730 
 
Accounting for Special Inventory Items ...................................... 735-760 
 
Accounting for Non-Inventory Items .......................................... 765-775 
 
 
 
Chapter VIII  Management of Stores (800-896) 
 
 
General ......................................................................................... 800-810 
 
Receipt of Stores .......................................................................... 815-835 
 
Issue of GLD Unallocated Stores ................................................ 845 
 
Issue of Departmental Stores ....................................................... 850-870 
 
Return of Stores ........................................................................... 875-880 
 
Safe Custody of Stores ................................................................. 885 
 
Handover of Stores ...................................................................... 890-895 
 
Security of Stores ......................................................................... 896 
 
 
 
Chapter IX  Collection and Delivery of Stores from Suppliers Outside   
Hong Kong (900-965) 
 
General ......................................................................................... 900-905 
 
Handling of Consigned Goods Received by the Director of  915 
Government Logistics ..................................................................
 
Receipt of Stores .......................................................................... 920 
 
Inspection of Stores Received ..................................................... 925-930 

 
Claims .......................................................................................... 935-965 
 
 
 
 
Chapter X  Stock Verification and Write-off (1000-1085) 
 
 
Stock Verification ........................................................................ 1000-1025 
 
Procedures for Dealing with Discrepancies ................................. 1030-1065 
 
Authority for Write-off of Lost/Deficient Stores ......................... 1070 
 
Replacement of Stores ................................................................. 1075 
 
Surcharge ..................................................................................... 1080-1085 
 
 
 
Chapter XI  Disposal of Surplus Stores (1100-1155) 
 
 
Scope ............................................................................................ 1100 
 
Departmental Disposal Authority ................................................ 1105-1108 
 
Disposal Procedures ..................................................................... 1110 
 
Disposal of Unserviceable Stores Items ...................................... 1115-1126 
 
Disposal of Serviceable Stores Items .......................................... 1130-1151 
 
Proper Accounting for Stores ...................................................... 1155 
 
 
 
Chapter XII  Disposal of Dangerous or Confiscated Goods (1200-1235) 
 
 
Disposal of Materials in a Dangerous Condition ......................... 1200 
 
Disposal of Confiscated Goods ................................................... 1205-1235 
 
 
 
Appendices 
 
 
Glossary 
 
 

INTRODUCTION 
 
VALIDITY OF GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS, CIRCULARS AND CIRCULAR 
MEMORANDA 
 
1. 
 
Government Regulations regulate matters relating to the conduct of 
Government business, the terms of appointment and conditions of service for Government 
servants, financial business and accounting operations, the management and procurement of 
Government stores and services, the security of Government records, and other miscellaneous 
matters.  They do not provide for necessary and self-evident exceptions. 
 
2. 
 
Save for Financial and Accounting Regulations and Stores and Procurement 
Regulations which are made under the provisions of the Public Finance Ordinance (Cap. 2), 
Government Regulations are Regulations made by or with the authority of the Chief 
Executive.  The sole authority for their interpretation and application is the Chief Executive, 
or those to whom he has delegated such authority. 
 
3. 
 
Government Regulations apply to all government servants, except in so far 
as — 
 
 
(a) 
a contrary intention appears in Government Regulations; or 
 
 
(b) 
an alternative provision is made for particular government servants in a piece 
of legislation which applies in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region; 
or 
 
 
(c) 
a Government Regulation is inconsistent with the terms of a piece of 
legislation which applies in the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region 
which apply to particular government servants; or 
 
 
(d) 
a particular government servant is excluded by the terms of his employment 
from the operation of a Government Regulation. 
 
4. 
 
Government Regulations are divided into 7 volumes as shown below.  The 
following public officers have been authorised to amend, supplement, apply, interpret and 
make exceptions to the Regulations in each Volume as shown — 
 
Volume 
Name Authority 
 

General Regulations 
Director of Administration 
 

Civil Service Regulations 
Secretary for the Civil Service 
 
3  (Part 1) 
Financial and Accounting 
Financial Secretary/Secretary for 
Regulations 
Financial Services and the Treasury 
 
  (Part 2) 
Standing Accounting Instructions 
Director of Accounting Services 
 


Stores and Procurement Regulations 
Financial 
Secretary/Secretary 
for 
Financial Services and the 
Treasury/Permanent Secretary for 
Financial Services and the Treasury 
(Treasury)# 
 

Security Regulations 
Secretary for Security 
 

Accommodation Regulations 
Secretary for Financial Services and 
the Treasury 
 

External Service Regulations 
Secretary 
for 
the 
Civil 
Service/Permanent Secretary for 
Commerce and Economic 
Development (Commerce, Industry 
and Tourism) and Permanent Secretary 
for Constitutional and Mainland 
Affairs*  
 
#  The Permanent Secretary for Financial Services and the Treasury (Treasury) is 
authorised to apply, interpret and make exceptions to the Stores and Procurement 
Regulations and related Financial Circulars. 
 
*  The Permanent Secretary for Commerce and Economic Development (Commerce, 
Industry and Tourism) or Permanent Secretary for Constitutional and Mainland 
Affairs is authorised to apply, interpret and make exceptions, where expressly stated, 
to the External Service Regulations in respect of staff posted to offices outside Hong 
Kong maintained by the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative 
Region. 
 
5. 
 
Government Regulations may be supplemented by Circulars and Circular 
Memoranda and the instructions contained therein are of equal application and force to the 
Regulations.  These Circulars and Circular Memoranda and their issuing authority are 
described below — 
 
General Regulations 
 
General 
Circulars 
and  
Director of Administration 
Circular Memoranda 
 
Civil Service Regulations   
Civil 
Service 
Bureau  
Secretary for the Civil 
Circulars and Circular  Service 
Memoranda 
 
Financial and Accounting  Financial Circulars and 
 Secretary 
for 
Financial 
Regulations 
Financial Services and the 
Services and the Treasury 
Treasury Bureau Circular 
Memoranda 
 
Standing Accounting 
 Accounting 
Circulars 
and 
 
Director of Accounting 
Instructions 
Circular Memoranda 
Services 
 

Stores and Procurement 
 Financial Circulars and 
 Secretary 
for 
Financial 
Regulations 
Financial Services and the 
Services and the Treasury 
Treasury Bureau Circular 
Memoranda 
 
  
Government 
Logistics 
 
Director of Government 
Department Circulars and 
Logistics 
Circular Memoranda 
 
Security Regulations 
 
Security 
Circulars 
and  
Secretary for Security 
Circular Memoranda 
 
Accommodation 
 Accommodation 
Circulars 
 Government  Property 
Regulations 
and Circular Memoranda 
Administrator 
 
 
External Service 
 
External Service Regulations  
Secretary for the Civil 
Regulations 
Circulars and Circular  Service 
Memoranda 
 
6. 
 
Each set of Circulars is issued in a single numbered series with a new series for 
each calendar year.  Circulars are reviewed annually and the first Circular of each calendar 
year indicates which of the previous Circulars remain in force.  Circular Memoranda may be 
numbered as for Circulars and are subject to regular review by the concerned issuing 
authorities. 
 
RESPONSIBILITY FOR KNOWLEDGE OF GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS, 
CIRCULARS AND CIRCULAR MEMORANDA 
 
10. 
 
It is the duty of all Government servants other than staff on daily rates of pay 
to be thoroughly acquainted with all Government Regulations, Circulars and Circular 
Memoranda on Conduct and Discipline, and such other Government Regulations, Circulars 
and Circular Memoranda as appertain to their duties. 
 
11. 
 
Where a Government servant disobeys or neglects or fails to observe the terms 
of Government Regulations, Circulars or Circular Memoranda on Conduct and Discipline 
appertaining to his/her duties, disciplinary proceedings may be taken against him/her and 
he/she may be held pecuniarily responsible for any financial loss to Government resulting 
from each disobedience, neglect or failure. 
 
DISTRIBUTION OF GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS, CIRCULARS AND 
CIRCULAR MEMORANDA 
 
12. 
 
It is the responsibility of a Head of Department to see that all his/her staff 
(other than on daily rates of pay) are provided with, or have made available to them, 
Government Regulations, Circulars and Circular Memoranda on Conduct and Discipline and 
such other Government Regulations, Circulars and Circular Memoranda as appertain to their 
duties. 
 

13. 
 
Government Regulations, Circulars and Circular Memoranda on Conduct and 
Discipline are available in a separate edition, of which there is a Chinese version.  All 
Government servants (other than staff on daily rates of pay) shall on first appointment to the 
service be provided with, or have made available to them a copy of the Government 
Regulations, Circulars and Circular Memoranda on Conduct and Discipline either in English 
or Chinese as appropriate. 
 
14. 
 
Copies of Government Regulations, Circulars and Circular Memoranda (other 
than the separate editions on Conduct and Discipline) are not to be regarded as the property of 
individuals but as part of the equipment of the office for which the copy is provided.  It is the 
duty of Heads of Departments to ensure that copies of Government Regulations, Circulars and 
Circular Memoranda are not retained by officers when transferred to another office. 
 
16. 
 
All Civil Service Bureau Circulars, Financial Circulars and General Circulars 
are categorised, on the basis of their respective contents, into one of the following scales of 
distribution — 
 
Scale A — to be brought to the attention of all staff. 
 
Scale B — to be brought to the attention of a particular group or groups of officers 
because of matters such as conditions of service, salaries and entitlements, 
rules and regulations applicable to them as individuals. 
 
Scale C — to be brought to the attention of officers who, because of the functions of their 
posts, are required to take action on, or to be informed of, the circular. 
 
Scale D — to be brought to the attention of officers who keep a copy of a particular set of 
Government Regulations and those, who because of the functions of their 
posts, are required to take action on, or to be informed of, the circular. 
 
There is no fixed scale for distribution of Circular Memoranda.  The normal distribution is 
usually Directors of Bureaux, Permanent Secretaries and Heads of Departments, with a copy 
to the Judiciary Administrator.  However, any of the above scales may be used, if necessary. 
 

CHAPTER I 
 
AUTHORITY, POLICY AND RESPONSIBILITY 
 
AUTHORITY FOR MAKING STORES AND PROCUREMENT REGULATIONS 
(SPRs) 
 
100.   
These Regulations are made by the Financial Secretary/Secretary for Financial 
Services and the Treasury (SFST) under section 11(1) of the Public Finance Ordinance 
(Cap. 2), and should be read in conjunction with that Ordinance. 
 
APPLICABILITY 
 
105.   
The SPRs apply to all public officers except in so far as they are inconsistent 
with any enactment.  They may be supplemented by Financial Circulars (FCs) and Financial 
Services and the Treasury Bureau Circular Memoranda (FSTBCM) which are of equal 
application and force as these Regulations. 
 
PROCUREMENT POLICY AND PRINCIPLES  
 
106.            
The policy of government procurement is to obtain stores and services at the 
best value for money in a publicly accountable manner to support Government’s programmes 
and activities.    
 
107.           
To  make  the  best  use  of  public  resources  and  be  accountable  to  the  public, 
bureaux and departments (referred to as “departments” hereafter) should aim to achieve the 
best value for money in procurement.  “Value for money” does not simply mean buying at the 
lowest price.  “Value for money” should be assessed in terms of economy, effectiveness and 
efficiency, taking into account the total costs involved (measured on a whole-life costing 
basis) and the overall value to be created or brought about through the procurement.  In other 
words, “value for money” means the optimal use of resources to achieve the best outcome. 
Controlling Officers (COs) should ensure that public funds are well spent in terms of the total 
positive value to be created or brought about by the procurement.  The positive values may 
include (but are not limited to) social, environmental, economic and/or other positive values 
that serve the interest of the public.  When conducting procurements, COs should fully take 
into account the consideration of whether the procurement is more costly than necessary. 
They should be satisfied that the procurements are genuinely required and fully justified on 
legitimate and defensible grounds, for example, meeting essential operational needs and/or 
achieving better value for money for the procurements.  
 
108.          
 Procurement  decisions  are  subject  to  review  by  the  relevant  authorities.  For 
procurements covered by the Agreement on Government Procurement of the World Trade 
Organization (WTO GPA), they are also subject to review by the Review Body on Bid 
Challenges.  COs are accountable to the public for the purchasing decisions of their 
departments, and should ensure that the decisions are properly justified and documented. 
 
109.          
The  policy  of  government  procurement  is  underpinned  by  the  following 
principles –  
 

(a)  Open and fair competition 
 
(i)  
Competition is a reliable safeguard against bidders overcharging and holding 
Government to ransom.  By encouraging participation through open and fair 
competition, the Government will be better able to obtain responsive and 
competitive bids that ensure value for money.    
 
(ii) 
As a norm, open bidding should be adopted as far as practicable.  Single/restricted 
tendering or direct engagement of suppliers/service providers/consultants should 
be the exception and must be properly justified to the satisfaction of the relevant 
approving authority.   
 
(iii) 
All bidders should be treated on an equal footing.  There should be no 
discrimination on the basis of the country of origin of the goods or service 
providers.  Requirements, tender specifications and marking schemes (where 
applicable) should be drawn up in an objective manner, providing a level playing 
field for all to compete on an equal footing. 
 
(iv) 
For procurements with limited competition in past exercises, departments should 
explore measures to enhance competition and satisfy themselves that the tendering 
or consultants selection strategy to attract new bidders and innovative proposals is 
effective. 
 
(b)  Transparency 
 
To uphold public accountability and fairness of the procurement process, government 
procurement should be conducted in a transparent manner.  In a procurement exercise, 
potential bidders should be given the same information.  Departments should make 
available tender notices for all open tenders and invitations for admission to 
suppliers/service providers’ lists on their webpages.  Tender documents or consultancy 
briefs should be clear, concise and easy to understand to avoid complicating and adding 
to the cost of the bidding process. 
 
(c)  Pro-innovation 
 
Innovation is conducive to securing value for money in the long run.  Departments should 
encourage and be receptive to new ideas from suppliers / service providers, and allow 
room for assessing innovative proposals in the procurement process.   Outcome-based 
requirements should be adopted as far as possible.  Over-specification and over-
prescription in product requirements or mode of service delivery should be avoided.  For 
the procurement of stores, services (excluding works contracts and consultancy) and 
revenue contracts, “innovation” includes –  
 
(i)        technology related innovation, meaning the use of new technology or innovative 
application of existing technology in the supply of stores or services; and  
 
 
 
         

 
(ii) 
ideas or suggestions with no technology content which are not conventionally 
adopted or readily envisaged by departments that may create positive value to the 
Government or the public.  These may include ideas or suggestions that are 
conducive to the delivery of public services (e.g. resulting in a cleaner 
environment in a street cleansing service contract), contribute to defined policy 
objectives of the Government (e.g. contribution to environmental protection in a 
facility management service contract, or employment of persons with disability in 
a vehicle maintenance service contract), or better serve the needs of endusers (e.g. 
meeting user-centric requirements, which are generated from design thinking 
process as per the guidelines provided by the Commerce and Economic 
Development Bureau / Efficiency Office (EffO) from time to time.). 
 
(d)  Integrity  
 
To uphold the integrity of government procurement, procurement decisions should be 
made in an impartial manner and public funds spent in an accountable way. 
 
RESPONSIBILITIES OF PUBLIC OFFICERS 
 
110.  (a) 
No public officer will be relieved of any portion of his responsibility if he 
deputes to his subordinates the performance of duties for which he has overall 
responsibility.  Any public officer contravening any of these Regulations, FCs 
or FSTBCM may be subject to disciplinary proceedings. 
 
 
(b) 
Any person who is or was employed as a public officer may be liable to be 
surcharged in the circumstances detailed in section 32 of the Public Finance 
Ordinance.  COs who become aware of any of these circumstances shall 
investigate the matter fully and, as soon as practicable, shall forward a detailed 
report to the Permanent Secretary for Financial Services and the Treasury 
(Treasury) (PS(Tsy)) with copies to the Secretary for the Civil Service, 
Director of Accounting Services (DAS) and Director of Audit (D of A). 
 
115.   
The respective responsibilities of the Director of Government Logistics (DGL) 
and D of A for checking and reporting any shortcomings in connection with procurement 
activities and government stores do not absolve any public officer from his responsibility for 
complying, or ensuring compliance, with instructions within the scope of his own duties. 
 


 
AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE TENDER BOARDS/ 
COMMITTEES AND CONSULTANTS SELECTION BOARDS/COMMITTEES 
 
116.   
The structure for the approval of tenders and consultancies and the key 
financial limits for tender boards/ consultants selection boards and COs are summarised 
below – 
 
Central Tender Board
All procurement types
No $ limit
Central 
Consultants 
Engineering 
Architectural 
Selection 
and 
and 
Board
Associated 
Associated  
Government 
Consultants 
Consultants 
Logistics 
All  except 
Selection 
Selection 
Public Works 
AACSB and 
Board
Department 
Board
Tender Board
EACSB 
(AACSB)
(EACSB)
Tender Board
consultancies
No $ limit
No $ limit
Stores/
No $ limit
Works & related 
services (non‐
services
works)/revenue
≤$200M
≤$60M
Departmental Tender Committee
Departmental  Consultants 
Stores/services/revenue, except works
Selection Committee
≤$10M
≤ $10M
Where  quotations are called, 
Where quotations are called , 
the  limits are ≤ $7M for works and 
the  limit is  ≤ $3M
≤ $1.4M for  other procurement
Note:  Details in SPR 220, 310 and 425‐426
 
AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE DIRECTOR OF GOVERNMENT 
LOGISTICS 
 
120.  (a) 
DGL is responsible for advising departments on implementing good practice 
on their management of stores and procurement activities and for conducting 
compliance checks on such activities according to prescribed criteria to ensure 
compliance with these Regulations and other relevant instructions.  
 
 
 
 
(b) 
In the exercise of his duties, DGL shall have access to all records, books, 
vouchers, documents and receipts relating to procurement exercises conducted 
by and government stores in the possession of any public officer. 
 
 
(c) 
DGL may issue Government Logistics Department (GLD) Circulars and 
Circular Memoranda to supplement these Regulations, FCs and FSTBCM 
relating to the procurement of stores and services and management of 
government stores.  With the approval of PS(Tsy), the instructions contained 
therein are of equal application and force to these Regulations. 
 

AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTROLLING OFFICERS 
 
125.   
COs are responsible for the procurement of stores, services and revenue 
contracts within the financial limits set out in the SPRs, and the management of the stores and 
services procured and the contracts awarded.  COs shall observe the policy and principles set 
out in SPRs 106 – 109 and uphold a culture of compliance with the requirements set out in the 
SPRs, regularly remind all the staff concerned about their need to always comply with the 
SPRs and closely monitor their compliance. 
 
126.            COs may develop departmental instructions as appropriate to guide public officers 
in the department in conducting government procurement and stores management, provided 
that such instructions comply with SPRs and have been approved by DGL.  For works and 
works-related consultancy contracts, COs may also develop departmental instructions with 
reference to Development Bureau Technical Circular (Works) (DEVB TC(W)).  Within the 
departmental procurement and stores management system, there should be institutional 
safeguards designed with adequate checks and balances as well as clear segregation of roles 
and duties.  On procurement, COs or designated officers should agree on the segregation of 
duties before tenders are invited.  COs should ensure that public officers involved in the 
procurement exercises are alert to actual, potential and perceived conflict of interest and 
sufficient safeguards are in place to avoid or manage such conflict of interest situations in 
accordance with Chapter IA.  
 
127.   
For procurement covered by WTO GPA, COs shall observe the provisions 
therein.  
 
128.   
On stores management, COs should ensure the effective and efficient use of 
government stores to support Government’s programmes and activities.  COs should put in 
place the necessary measures to ensure that government stores are properly kept and 
accounted for and that regular and surprise inspections are conducted to examine the 
adequacy of security arrangements for stores management. 
 
130.   
COs should reply promptly to any queries addressed to them by the D of A or 
DGL, giving fully the particulars, explanations and information required. 
 
135.   
COs should appoint a Departmental Stores Manager (DSM) to assist them in 
supervising all procurement and stores management matters within their purview.  The DSM 
may be assisted by Supplies Grade staff and/or non-Supplies Grade staff.   Purchasing and 
stores management functions should normally be performed by Supplies Grade staff.  COs 
should make available sufficient Supplies Grade staff to discharge these functions in an 
appropriate manner. 
 
HANDLING OF COMPLAINTS 
 
160.  (a) 
Contractors, suppliers, firms or organisations may lodge complaints about the 
process or result of a procurement exercise to the procuring department, the 
relevant tender board/consultants selection board, or the Office of The 
Ombudsman.  If there is suspected corruption, complaints may be made to the 
Independent Commission Against Corruption. 
 

 
(b)  For procurements covered by WTO 
GPA, contractors/suppliers/service 
providers may also make a challenge against alleged breaches of WTO GPA to 
the Review Body on Bid Challenges. 
 
 
(c) 
COs should put in place an effective complaint-handling system in accordance 
with SPR and other relevant government regulations/ circulars/ guidelines. 
On receipt of a complaint or the referral of a complaint, CO of the procuring 
department should personally ensure that the complaint is to be handled in an 
impartial and timely manner, and that an early and substantive reply is to be 
provided to the complainant direct or through the referral office within ten 
working days.  An interim reply should be sent to the complainant if a 
substantive reply cannot be issued within the above timeframe.  All complaints 
and the substantive replies should be brought to the attention of the relevant 
tender board or consultants selection board. 
 
 
(d) 
If the CO has been personally involved in the procurement exercise and an 
apparent conflict of interest may arise, he should refer the complaint to the 
relevant tender board or consultants selection board (depending on the value 
and the nature of procurement) for consideration after investigation by his 
department.  The CO or a designated directorate officer should present the 
complaint, the outcome of the investigation and recommendations on way 
forward to the relevant tender board or consultants selection board.  The 
relevant tender board or consultants selection board will decide on how the 
complaint should be taken forward. 
 
 (e)
If the relevant tender board or consultants selection board believes that there is 
 
 scope for changing the procurement policy or system, it should make a 
recommendation to the PS(Tsy) and for works-related items, the Permanent 
Secretary for Development (Works) for consideration.  

CHAPTER IA 
 
AVOIDING AND MANAGING CONFLICT OF INTEREST 
IN GOVERNMENT PROCUREMENT 
 
GENERAL AND APPLICABILITY 
 
180.   
It is the responsibility of all public officers to ensure the integrity and 
impartiality of the Government’s procurement process.  Conflict of interest situations may 
arise in cases where a public officer exercises his authority, influences decisions and actions 
or gains access to valuable information, perhaps but not necessarily restricted or confidential. 
Conflict of interest may also arise from participation by consulting firms/organisations 
(hereinafter referred to as “consulting firms”) or contractors in government procurement.  All 
public officers involved in procurement must be alert to situations which may lead to actual, 
potential or perceived conflict of interest and ensure that sufficient safeguards are in place to 
avoid such situations from arising or manage such situations.  The principles and guidelines 
set out in this Chapter apply to all types of government procurement including revenue 
contracts, irrespective of value. 
 
AVOIDING AND MANAGING CONFLICTS WITH PRIVATE INTERESTS 
 
185.   
All public officers involved in government procurement, including in particular 
the head or chairperson, members and/or secretary of all committees/working groups 
responsible for preparing tender documentation (including tender specifications and marking 
schemes), tender opening teams, tender assessment panels (TAPs), departmental tender 
committees (DTCs), departmental consultants selection committees (DCSCs), tender boards 
and consultants selection boards, must — 
 
 (a) 
avoid conflicts, whether actual, potential or perceived, arising between their 
official duties and their private interests.  Private interests include the financial 
and other interests of the public officer, the public officer’s relatives and close 
associates, or persons to whom the public officer is indebted or owes a favour, 
as defined in relevant civil service guidelines (including Civil Service Bureau 
Circular No. 2/2004 on “Conflict of Interest” or any updated version); 
 
 (b) 
declare all such conflicts or relevant private interests as soon as the public 
officer is aware of them to enable his supervisors, the head or the chairperson 
of the relevant tender preparation team, tender opening team, TAP, DTC, 
DCSC, tender board or consultants selection board to decide whether the 
public officer should continue to be involved in the specific procurement 
exercise; 
 
 (c) 
observe prevailing civil service code and guidelines on how to prevent or deal 
with conflict of interest situations; and 
 
 (d) 
observe prevailing Security Regulations and not make unauthorised disclosure 
or take advantage of any tender-related information whether or not for 
personal gain. 
 

186.   
All public officers involved in preparing tender documentation (including 
tender specifications and marking schemes), assessing tenders and conducting negotiations 
must declare whether they have any actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest upon 
their taking up of the respective responsibilities in procurement matters and as soon as they 
become aware of such actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest.  Departments must 
state in each tender report whether or not the public officers involved in preparing tender 
documentation (including tender specifications and marking schemes), assessing tenders and 
conducting negotiations have declared their interest and, where conflicts of interest (actual, 
potential or perceived) have been identified, what remedial action has been taken.  A 
specimen declaration and undertaking is at Appendix I(A).  
 
187.   
The head or chairperson, members and/or secretary of all tender opening 
teams, DTCs, DCSCs, tender boards and consultants selection boards who handle 
procurement matters are required to sign an undertaking upon taking up these responsibilities, 
and are also required to renew their undertaking at least annually.  A specimen undertaking is 
at Appendix I(B). 
 
188.   
COs of the procuring department must — 
 
 (a) 
remind all colleagues involved in government procurement, at regular 
intervals, to observe strict confidentiality rules with regard to tender-related 
information and to declare any private interests as may arise in relation to the 
procurement, or in relation to the parties offering the stores,  services or 
revenue contracts being procured; 
 
 (b) 
ensure that all declarations are drawn to the attention of the head or the 
chairperson of the tender preparation team, tender opening team, TAP, DTC, 
DCSC, tender board or consultants selection board as the case may be.  If the 
public officer making the declaration is the head or the chairperson himself, 
his declaration should be drawn to the attention of his supervisor.  All such 
declarations and actions taken must be recorded and filed properly; 
 
 
(c) 
if a public officer has declared an interest and the supervisor, the head or the 
chairperson of the tender preparation team, tender opening team, TAP, DTC, 
DCSC, tender board or consultants selection board rules that the public officer 
should not continue to handle the specific procurement exercise, redeploy, if 
necessary, other staff to take the place of the public officer who has declared 
an interest in the procurement exercise; and 
 
 (d) 
consider and if appropriate draw up supplementary guidelines to fit the 
circumstances of the department on the detection, avoidance and management 
of conflicts in government procurement, making reference to the “Government 
Procurement of General Goods and Services” published by the Independent 
Commission Against Corruption as appropriate. 

 
AVOIDING AND MANAGING CONFLICTS THAT MAY ARISE FROM THE 
DIFFERENT ROLES OF CONSULTING FIRMS/CONTRACTORS 
 
190.  
Departments 
must 
be alert to the potential conflict of interest which may arise 
from the different roles or assignments a consulting firm or contractor may take up, whether 
in relation to the same project for which that consulting firm or contractor was or remains 
engaged by the Government in the first place, or other related projects. 
 
191.   
It is not possible to list all situations in which potential conflicts of interest 
may arise.  One typical situation is where a firm/organisation (hereinafter referred to as 
“firm”), having acted as Government’s consultant for a project, bids as a contractor or is 
involved as a controlling shareholder or subcontractor of the contractor in a subsequent 
exercise for the procurement arising out of the consultancy or which was the very subject of 
the consultancy. 
 
192.   
To ensure that Government receives from consulting firms objective 
professional advice which is not tailored or fashioned with regard to promoting that 
consulting firm’s or its associate’s products and/or services, and to maintain a level-playing 
field in the procedures for government procurement, departments must — 
 
 (a) 
ascertain  as far as practicable, before the award of a consultancy, whether 
there is any reason to disqualify a consulting firm which has expressed an 
interest in undertaking a government consultancy on grounds of actual, 
potential or perceived conflicts of interest; 
 
 (b) 
oblige the selected consulting firm to report on situations which may give rise 
to those conflicts; and 
 
 (c) 
debar the selected consulting firm and its associate(s) from participating in 
any subsequent exercise for the procurement arising out of or which was the 
very subject of the consultancy, save for the circumstances specified in 
SPR 194. 
 
Departments should consult the Department of Justice (D of J) on the provisions to be 
included in consultancy briefs and consultancy agreements to reflect the requirements in 
SPR 192(b) and (c) above. 
 
193.   
There may be circumstances where a strict ban on future participation in 
procurement exercises is not practicable.  Departments which are not able to comply with the 
principles and guidelines set out in SPR 192 above must approach the relevant consultants 
selection board (or tender board if the professional advice is procured through a tender 
exercise) for a ruling. 
 
194.   
If, for reasons acceptable to the relevant consultants selection board, a 
department would not want to debar a firm which has acted as its consultant and/or the 
consultant’s associates from participating in exercises for the procurement arising out of or 
which was the very subject of the consultancy, the department must — 
 

 (a) 
review the recommendations of the consultant, including the proposed tender 
specifications for the implementation tender, to satisfy itself that the tender 
document is and is seen to be objective and unbiased having regard to the role 
and recommendations of that consulting firm.  The relevant CO should appoint 
a review committee comprising public officers who have not been involved in 
the consultancy in question and who can serve as a credible and effective 
checking body, and the decisions should be clearly recorded; and 
 
 
 
 (b) 
specify in the tender notices for the implementation tenders that the firm 
appointed for the consultancy studies is a potential bidder but that all the 
information which was made available to that firm and all the advice which the 
firm has provided and which is relevant to the tender will equally be made 
available to all potential tenderers upon request. 
 
 
 
Under no circumstances may a consulting firm (including its associates) that has advised on 
the preparation of the tender document, including tender specifications and marking scheme, 
be allowed to bid, participate or be financially involved in that or related tender exercise. 
 
195.  (a) 
Departments must bear in mind the requirement that all consulting firms must 
not only have, but be seen to have, an equal opportunity to participate in any 
consultants selection exercise.  Where members of a consulting firm participate 
with government departments in committees, working groups, boards, etc. in 
the course of which the need to engage consulting firms to perform 
assignments arises, departments must without any delay — 
 
  (i) 
require the person concerned to disengage himself immediately from 
the committee, working group, board, etc., as the case may be; or 
 
  (ii) 
request the person concerned to undertake in writing that his consulting 
firm will not compete for, participate or be financially involved in the 
assignment whether as the main consultant or sub-consultant or 
otherwise. 
 
 
(b) 
Departments must not put pressure on prospective consulting firms to employ 
particular sub-consultants or be over-enthusiastic in matching sub-consultants 
with consulting firms.  Information on the availability of specialist 
sub-consultants should be provided to all firms in the invitation to submit an 
expression of interest (EOI) and/or a tender, if it is considered essential for the 
main consultants to have such information. 
 
196.   
When a consulting firm submits a bid as a main consultant while concurrently 
bidding as a sub-consultant of other competing main consultant(s) in the same consultants 
selection exercise or when a consulting firm teams up as a sub-consultant with more than one 
bidding main consulting firm, the question of potential or perceived role conflict may arise 
unless these different roles are disclosed to all participants, including those bidding as main or 
sub-consultants.  Departments shall require all consulting firms to disclose their competing 
roles, if any, in a consultants selection exercise and to confirm in the consultancy proposal 
that no confidential information, confidentiality restrictions or restraints of trade or business 
have been contravened in lodging the proposal in which the main consultant and/or sub-
consultant are in common or affiliated with the sub-consultant of another bidder. 
Departments should consult D of J as necessary to include a provision in the consultancy brief 
and consultancy agreement reflecting the aforesaid requirements. 

197.   
Under special circumstances, advice may need to be sought from technical 
experts outside the Government (paragraph 3 of Appendix III(G)1).  To ensure that the 
Government receives from outside technical experts objective professional advice which is 
not intended to favour any particular consulting firms or contractors, and to maintain a level-
playing field in the procedures for government procurement, departments must — 
 
 (a) 
ascertain as far as practicable, before the engagement of any outside 
technical expert, whether there is any reason to disqualify such expert who 
has expressed an interest in undertaking the role of technical expert on 
grounds of actual, potential or perceived conflicts of interest; and 
 
 (b) 
oblige the outside technical expert engaged to report on situations which may 
give rise to those conflicts. 
 
Departments may consult the D of J as appropriate on the provisions to be included in the 
letter or agreement when engaging outside technical experts to reflect the requirements in 
SPR 197(b) above.  The outside technical experts should be invited to complete the 
declaration/undertaking at Appendix I(C). 
 
 
198.   
If actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest is identified in engaging the 
outside technical expert, it should be drawn to the attention of the Chairman of the TAP as 
specified in paragraph 5 of Appendix III(G)1.  The actions taken should be properly 
documented and reported to the DTC, DCSC, tender board or consultants selection board as 
appropriate.  
  

CHAPTER II 
 
PROCUREMENT OF STORES, SERVICES 
AND REVENUE CONTRACTS 
 
GENERAL 
 
200.   
For the purpose of these Regulations — 
 
 
(a) 
government stores refer to all articles purchased or acquired on behalf of 
Government, excluding land and buildings; 
 
 
(b) 
services refer to tasks performed by firms for and on behalf of Government, 
which include services for construction and engineering works, consultancy 
services and other general services; 
 
 
(c) 
where a contract for the supply of stores includes the provision of incidental 
services and the value of the services does not exceed that of the stores, the 
contract shall be construed as a contract for the supply of stores.  Where a 
contract for the supply of services includes the provision of stores and the 
value of the stores does not exceed that of the services, the contract shall be 
construed as a contract for the supply of services; and 
 
 
(d) 
revenue contracts refer to contracts that generate revenue for and on behalf of 
Government. 
 
205.   
The financial limits set out in these Regulations refer to the total value of 
stores or services of a similar nature or total value of revenue which, in normal practice, are 
obtained or generated in a single purchase or contract.  COs should ensure that public officers 
responsible for procurement matters interpret these limits strictly, and that they do not evade 
the limits by dividing procurement requirements into instalments or by reducing the usual 
duration of contracts.  In making procurement, COs should consolidate requirements of stores 
and services of similar nature as far as possible to achieve better economies of scale.  COs 
may be held personally responsible for the amount so expended or revenue so lost if they 
allow or order the procurement of stores, services or revenue contracts without proper 
authority.  
 
206.   
Where the purchase is for replacement stores or equipment, trade-in option 
should be considered as far as practicable.  Apart from the monetary return, the opportunity 
can be taken to use the contractors’ resources to dispose of the stores which would otherwise 
have to be arranged separately by the concerned department at a cost to the Government. 
When determining the value of purchases, departments should only count the value of the new 
stores instead of the net value after deducting the value of the trade-in items. 
 
210.   
The procurement of specific stores is subject to endorsement by the appropriate 
authority.  These endorsement authorities and the respective procurement agents, where 
applicable, are listed at Appendix II. 
 

216.   
While procurement should normally be conducted at departmental 
headquarters, COs can authorise any procurement of their own departments to be conducted in 
branches/divisions/sub-offices, as appropriate. 
 
217.  
There must be clear segregation of roles and responsibilities in the 
procurement process.  As far as possible, the users of the stores and services to be procured 
and the public officers who initiate procurement of revenue contracts should not be the 
approving authority for inviting bids, or approving the acceptance of offer, where applicable. 
Furthermore, the public officer who approves and/or selects the suppliers/service 
providers/potential bidders for inviting bids shall not be the public officer authorising the 
acceptance of the offer for that procurement. 
 
TYPES OF PROCUREMENT PROCEDURES 
 
220.   
The Financial Secretary has delegated the authority to COs to procure stores, 
services and revenue contracts of value not exceeding the financial limits, by way of 
quotations or tendering, as stated below — 
 
 
 
Financial limits 
Procurement type 
(up to and including) 
Procedures to be followed 
 
(a) (i) Stores 
Quotation Limit:  
For items within Quotation 
 
 
Limit  -  Quotation procedures 
(ii) Services  (other  $3 million for 
in Chapter II of the SPRs.  
than those 
consultancy services; 
Alternatively, if COs prefer 
covered by (b)  $1.4 million  for  other  (say for greater competition), 
below) 
items 
tender procedures or 
 
 
consultants selection 
(iii) Consultancy 
Departmental Limit: 
procedures in Chapter III or IV 
services 
$10 million 
of the SPRs.  
(general and 
 
works-related 
For items beyond Quotation 
consultancy) 
Limit - Tender procedures or 
 
consultants selection 
(iv) Revenue 
procedures in Chapter III or 
contracts Note 1 
IV of the SPRs.   
 
(b) Services 
for  Quotation Limit:  
For items within Quotation 
construction and 
$7 million 
Limit  -  Quotation procedures 
engineering 
 
in Chapter II of the SPRs. 
works Note 2 
Departmental Limit: 
Alternatively, if COs prefer 
$55 million for non-
(say for greater competition), 
WTO GPA works 
 
tender procedures in 
contracts Note 3  procured  Chapter III of the SPRs.  
under the simplified  
tendering arrangement For items beyond Quotation 
as set out in FC Limit - Tender procedures in 
No. 3/2009 (as may be  Chapter III of the SPRs and FC 
updated from time to  No. 3/2009 if applicable.  
time) 

 
Note 
 
1.  Sale of goods for disposal of government stores or confiscated goods will be dealt with by 
GLD. 
 
2.  They only cover those services which fall under Division 51 of the United Nations 
Provisional Central Product Classification Code which is accessible at 
http://portal.ccgo.hksarg/en/ia/DisplayIAByCat.jsf?cat=3766#3766 
 
3.  For classification of works contracts, please refer to DEVB TC(W) No. 5/2012 (as may 
be updated from time to time) and guidelines issued by the Development Bureau 
(DEVB). 
 
221.  
For 
procurements 
beyond the respective quotation limits specified in SPR 220, 
departments shall follow the tender or consultants selection procedures laid down in 
Chapter III or Chapter IV respectively, and supplementary instructions, as appropriate. 
Departments may choose to follow the tender or consultants selection procedures for 
procurement within the respective quotation limits.  In such cases, the relevant procedures 
(including the use of marking scheme in general) in Chapter III or Chapter IV, will apply. 
Procurements adopting the tender or consultants selection procedures shall be subject to the 
approval or advice of the relevant tender board/ committee or consultants selection board/ 
committee. 
 
221A.   
  Departments may choose to adopt a marking scheme for evaluation of offers 
for procurements under the quotation procedures.  In such case, departments should observe 
the guidelines and the authority for adopting a marking scheme at Appendix III(G).  For 
works contracts and consultancy services, the marking scheme shall be approved by a 
directorate officer before invitation of quotations.  For procurement of stores, services 
(excluding works contracts and consultancy) and revenue contracts, the use of a marking 
scheme which deviates from the Standard Marking Scheme Framework (SMS Framework) 
shall be approved by a directorate officer before invitation of quotations.  As a general rule, 
irrespective of the use of marking schemes, tenderer’s experience should not be set as an 
essential requirement in non-works procurement.  If it is absolutely necessary, prior approval 
must be sought from public officers (normally at directorate level) designated by COs.  The 
justifications for seeking exception from the general rule and the grounds for approval should 
be properly recorded. 
 
222.   
Departments may refer to the lists of contractors/suppliers/service providers 
maintained by the GLD or maintain their own lists of contractors/ suppliers/service providers 
for inviting quotations for the procurement of stores, services and revenue contracts not 
exceeding the quotation limits in SPR 220.  If departments maintain their own lists, they 
should publish their methods and invitations for admission to the lists of 
contractors/suppliers/service providers on their webpages. 
 

PROCUREMENT OF STORES THROUGH THE GOVERNMENT LOGISTICS 
DEPARTMENT 
 
235.  (a) 
DGL is the procurement agent for stores with a value beyond the departmental 
limit specified in SPR 220(a).  Departments shall make their requests to the 
DGL for procurement of stores which are neither held in unallocated stock by 
the GLD nor covered by a bulk contract arranged by the GLD in accordance 
with the arrangements set out in (c)-(f) below. 
 
 
(b) 
For the procurement of stores not exceeding the departmental limit specified in 
SPR 220(a), departments may seek assistance from the DGL for preparation of 
tender documents and invitation of tenders or as an alternative, conduct their 
own tender exercises.  Departments choosing to conduct their own tender 
exercises have the authority to prepare their tender documents (including 
tender specifications and marking schemes), assess tenders received and 
approve acceptance of offers. 
 
 
 
 
(c) 
For procurement of stores through the DGL, departments should make full use 
of GLD’s Procurement and Contract Management System to submit their 
procurement requests.   
 
 
(d) 
To obtain competitive offers, departments shall use general specifications 
prepared in accordance with the provisions set out in SPR 350.  Specifications 
having the effect of suiting a particular supplier should not be adopted, unless 
exceptionally justified.  If necessary, the DGL or departments may refer the 
matter to the relevant tender board for consideration. 
 
 
 
 
(e) 
Delivery of stores by air, if proposed, should be the exception and needs full 
justification. 
 
 
(f) 
If the stores to be procured require the endorsement of an appropriate authority 
(such as vehicles, furniture and equipment items in the public works projects, 
safes, printing-related equipment, etc.), departments should attach to the 
request a copy of the approval from the endorsement authority. 
 
PROCUREMENT OF STORES BY DEPARTMENTS 
 
245.   
Departments may procure stores of a value not exceeding the departmental 
limit specified in SPR 220(a) direct, rather than through the GLD, if such stores are -  
 
(a)  not held in unallocated stock by the GLD; or 
 
(b)  not covered by a bulk contract arranged by the GLD. 
 
If notwithstanding (a) and (b) above, departments still want to procure stores direct, they shall 
seek the DGL’s prior consent having regard to value for money consideration.  Except in the 
case of urgent minor purchases under SPR 265, departments shall follow the procedures set 
out in SPR 260 or the tender procedures set out in Chapter III when making direct purchases. 
 

246.   
Departments may only make repeated purchases of the same items within 
12 months if the cumulative value of the purchases does not exceed the quotation limit set out 
in SPR 220(a).  If departments have to use a particular item regularly in quantities with a 
value in excess of the quotation limit, departments shall follow the tender procedures laid 
down in Chapter III and supplementary instructions, as appropriate.  For purchases outside 
Hong Kong on Free on Board terms, the quotation limit includes the Free on Board value of 
the stores procured, but excludes the freight, insurance and other incidental charges. 
 
254.   
When preparing specifications, departments may make reference to the 
Guidelines for Drawing Up Tender Specifications at Appendix III(F), where appropriate.   
 
Authorisation and control 
 
255.   
For the purpose of exercising adequate control over direct purchases, COs must 
designate a public officer to approve the issue of formal orders.  Unless otherwise approved 
by the DGL, the public officer should not be lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies 
Officer/Executive Officer II or equivalent, who shall report to a more senior ranked DSM 
appointed under SPR 135.  Before authorising the issue of formal orders, the public officer 
must ensure that the procedures set out below are fully complied with.  Only in exceptional 
circumstances, and subject to the clearance of the DSM, may departments make purchases 
before placing formal orders.  When this occurs, the public officer handling the purchase must 
provide a clear explanation on file for record purpose. 
 
260. (a)  For purchases with a value not exceeding $50,000, with the exception of 
those urgent minor purchases made under SPR 265, departments should 
normally invite more than one supplier for quotations and accept the lowest 
conforming offer or the conforming offer with the highest overall score (if a 
marking scheme is used).  Departments shall designate public officers of not 
lower than the rank of Supplies Supervisor II or equivalent to handle the 
selection of suppliers and to contact them for quotations.  Public officers 
contacting suppliers for quotations shall record on file the particulars such as 
the names and contact details of the suppliers contacted and details of the 
quotations received for audit purpose.  The acceptance of an offer can only be 
approved by a public officer of not lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies 
Officer/Executive Officer II or equivalent.  This public officer shall certify on 
file that the prices quoted are reasonable.  The purchase shall be made through 
purchasing cards unless the CO, or a designated officer not lower than the rank 
of Chief Executive Officer or equivalent, has authorised in writing otherwise. 
Departments should follow supplementary guidelines issued by the DGL on 
the use of purchasing cards for low value purchases.  
 

 (b) 
For purchases with a value over $50,000 but not exceeding the quotation 
limit set out in SPR 220(a)
, departments must invite at least five written 
quotations, save for the circumstances stated under (d) below and follow the 
procedures in (d)-(g) below. 
 

 
(c) 
Departments shall forward copies of their purchase orders, together with a 
summary return listing out purchases over $50,000 in value, to the DGL at 
half-yearly intervals ending 31 March and 30 September respectively.  For all 
purchases with a value exceeding $500,000, explanations have to be provided 
in the returns if the number of written quotations received is less than five 
and/or an offer of a higher price or not obtaining the highest score (if a 
marking scheme is used) is accepted. 
 
Invitation of quotations 
 
260.  (d) 
Provided that no less than five written quotations are invited, public officers at 
the levels listed in column (A) of the table below are authorised to approve the 
issue of invitations and/or selection of suppliers for inviting quotations.  For 
the purpose of this Chapter, written quotations by electronic mail, facsimile or 
post are accepted.  In cases where it is not possible to invite no less than five 
written quotations, or it is justified to invite less than five written quotations, 
such as in the case of purchases from a sole agent or supplier, the approving 
authority is listed in column (B) of the table below – 
 
 
 
 
Approving Officer 
Value of the 
(not lower than the rank of) 
Purchase 
  
(A) 
(B) 
  (i) 
not 
exceeding 
Assistant Supplies Officer/  Supplies Officer/ 
20% of the 
Executive Officer II or Executive Officer I or 
quotation limit 
equivalent 
equivalent  
set out in 
 
SPR 220(a) 
 
  (ii) 
not 
exceeding 
Supplies Officer/ 
Senior Supplies Officer/ 
50% of the 
Executive Officer I or Senior Executive Officer 
quotation limit 
equivalent 
or equivalent  
set out in 
 
SPR 220(a) 
 
    (iii) 
up to the 
Senior Supplies Officer/ Chief Supplies Officer/ 
quotation limit 
Senior Executive Officer Chief Executive Officer 
set out in 
or equivalent 
or equivalent  
SPR 220(a) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The approving officer shall record on file the particulars such as the names and 
contact details of the suppliers proposed to be contacted, a brief explanatory 
note on the decision (in case less than five written quotations are invited) and 
the reasons for their selection. 
 
 
(e) 
After the necessary approval under (d) above is obtained, a public officer not 
lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive Officer II or 
equivalent shall contact the suppliers for quotations. 
 

 
(f) 
Where written quotations are invited, departments shall ask the suppliers to 
return the quotations in sealed envelopes, submit the quotations through 
e-Procurement System or other electronic procurement system where 
applicable, or by electronic mail/facsimile in cases where the receipt of 
quotations by electronic mail/facsimile has been authorised by the approving 
officers for the issue of invitations under (d) above, by a specified time.  A 
quotation opening team comprising two members, with the team leader at a 
rank not lower than that of Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive Officer II or 
equivalent, will open or vet the quotations received, and where applicable, 
date-stamp and initial quotations.  All written quotations received should be 
properly documented. 
 
Acceptance of offer 
 
260.  (g) 
Provided that no less than five written quotations are received, public officers 
at the levels listed in column (A) of the table below are authorised to approve 
the acceptance of the lowest conforming offer or the conforming offer with the 
highest overall score (if a marking scheme is used).  In cases where (i) less 
than five written quotations are received; (ii) less than five written quotations 
have been invited in accordance with SPR 260(d); or (iii) a higher conforming 
offer or a conforming offer not obtaining the highest overall score (if a 
marking scheme is used) is to be accepted under exceptional circumstances 
with full justifications, the approving authority is listed in column (B) of the 
table below – 
 
 
 
 
Approving Officer 
Value of the 
(not lower than the rank of) 
Purchase 
  
(A) 
(B) 
 
 
(i)  not exceeding 20% Supplies Officer/ 
Senior Supplies Officer/ 
of the quotation 
Executive Officer I or Senior Executive Officer 
limit set out in equivalent 
or equivalent 
SPR 220(a) 
 
 
 
(ii)  not exceeding 50% Senior Supplies Officer/ Chief Supplies Officer/ 
of the quotation 
Senior Executive Officer Chief Executive Officer 
limit set out in or equivalent 
or equivalent 
SPR 220(a) 
 
 
 
(iii)  up to the quotation Chief Supplies Officer/ D1 or equivalent 
limit set out in Chief Executive Officer 
SPR 220(a) 
or equivalent 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(h) 
Except for purchases made through purchasing cards and e-purchases made by 
placing e-orders, or as provided in SPR 265, departments shall place order 
using Departmental Order for Supply of Stores (GF 219) or a Letter of 
Acceptance, as appropriate. 
 

 
(i) 
Departments must certify all stores received against a direct purchase order by 
asking the public officer who receives the stores to sign on the invoice issued 
by the supplier.  Where this is impracticable, the public officer shall sign a 
receipt.  In either case, the invoice or receipt requires endorsement by a senior 
public officer. 
 
Purchases outside Hong Kong 
 
260.  (j) 
For direct purchases outside Hong Kong, except for purchases made through 
purchasing cards and e-purchases made by placing e-orders, departments shall 
place orders with the supplier outside Hong Kong by way of a Letter of 
Acceptance.  Departments should normally arrange collection and local 
delivery of the goods directly with the supplier.  For specialised stores such as 
arms and ammunition, departments may request the DGL to be the consignee 
of such goods and arrange collection and local delivery of the consigned 
goods.  Departments shall handle any claims arising from these direct 
purchases outside Hong Kong in accordance with SPR 935-965, with GLD 
rendering advice and assistance where necessary. 
 
Urgent minor purchases 
 
265.  (a) 
Public officers may make minor purchases of stores in cash or through 
purchasing cards to meet immediate needs, provided that the total value of the 
purchase does not exceed $5,000 each and the authorising officer not lower 
than the rank of Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive Officer II or equivalent 
is satisfied that such purchases are essential and the rates obtained are 
reasonable and certifies this on file.  For payments made in cash, the cost of 
such purchases will be reimbursed from a departmental imprest account. 
When claiming reimbursement, public officers shall use a Claim for 
Reimbursement of Expenses (GF 51).  For these purchases, departments do not 
need to issue covering orders, but shall maintain a copy of GF 51 issued for 
audit purpose. 
 
 
(b) 
Public officers not lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive 
Officer II or equivalent may make purchases of stores to meet departmental 
needs while on official visits outside Hong Kong, provided that the total value 
of the purchase does not exceed $25,000.  Public officers making such 
purchases shall follow the same reimbursement procedure described in 
SPR 265(a). 
 
PROCUREMENT OF SERVICES BY DEPARTMENTS 
 
280.  (a) 
Departments shall follow the provisions set out in these Regulations for 
procurement of services with a value not exceeding the quotation limits stated 
in SPR 220(a) or (b) as appropriate.  Reference may be made to A General 
Guide to Outsourcing prepared by EffO (formerly known as Efficiency Unit) 
for guidance.  When preparing specifications, departments may make 
reference to the Guidelines for Drawing Up Tender Specifications at Appendix 
III(F), where appropriate.  For service contracts that rely heavily on the 
deployment of non-skilled workers, departments should consider setting 
requirements in accordance with the relevant FCs. 
 

Authorisation and control 
 
280. (b)  For procuring services with a value not exceeding $50,000, with the 
exception of services procured under SPR 290, departments should normally 
invite more than one service provider for quotations and accept the lowest 
conforming offer or the conforming offer with the highest overall score (if a 
marking scheme is used).  Departments shall designate public officers of not 
lower than the rank of Supplies Supervisor II or equivalent to handle the 
selection of service providers and to contact them for quotations.  Public 
officers contacting service providers for quotations shall record on file the 
particulars such as the names and contact details of the service providers 
contacted and details of the quotations received for audit purpose.  The 
acceptance of an offer can only be approved by a public officer of not lower 
than the rank of Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive Officer II or equivalent. 
This public officer shall certify on file that the rates or amounts quoted are 
reasonable.    The procurement of services shall be made through purchasing 
cards unless the CO, or a designated officer not lower than the rank of Chief 
Executive Officer or equivalent, has authorised in writing otherwise. 
Departments should follow supplementary guidelines issued by the DGL on 
the use of purchasing cards for low value purchases. 
 
 (c) 
For procuring services with a value exceeding $50,000 but not exceeding 
the quotation limits stated in SPR 220(a) or (b) as appropriate

departments must invite written quotations from not less than five service 
providers, save for the circumstances stated under (d) below and follow the 
procedures set out in (d)-(g) below. 
 
Invitation of quotations 
 
280.  (d) 
Provided that no less than five written quotations are invited, public officers at 
the levels listed in column (A) of the table below are authorised to approve the 
issue of invitations and/or selection of service providers for inviting 
quotations.  For the purpose of this Chapter, written quotations by electronic 
mail, facsimile or post are accepted.  In cases where it is not possible to invite 
no less than five written quotations, or it is justified to invite less than five 
written quotations, such as in the case of purchases from a sole agent or 
service provider, the approving authority is listed in column (B) of the table 
below – 

 
 
 
 
Approving Officer 
Value of the 
(not lower than the rank of) 
Purchase 
  
(A) 
(B) 
  (i) 
not 
exceeding 
 
 
20% of the 
quotation limit 
set out in 
 
 
 
SPR 220(a) 
Assistant Supplies Officer/  Supplies Officer/ 
Executive Officer II or Executive Officer I or 
equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
  
SPR 
220(b) 
Assistant 
Engineer 
or 
Engineer or equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
  (ii) 
not 
exceeding 
 
 
50% of the 
quotation limit 
set out in 
 
 
 
SPR 220(a)  
Supplies 
Officer/  Senior Supplies Officer/ 
Executive Officer I or Senior Executive Officer 
equivalent 
or equivalent 
 
 
 
SPR 220(b) 
Engineer or equivalent 
Senior Engineer or 
 
equivalent 
 
 
 
(iii) 
up to the 
 
 
quotation limit 
set out in 
 
  
SPR 
220(a) 
Senior Supplies Officer/ Chief Supplies Officer/ 
(i), (ii) and (iv)  Senior Executive Officer Chief Executive Officer or 
or equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
  
SPR 
220(a) 
Chief Supplies Officer/ D1 or equivalent 
(iii) 
Chief Executive Officer 
 
or equivalent 
 
  
SPR 
220(b) 
Senior 
Engineer 
or 
Chief Engineer or 
equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
The approving officer shall record on file the particulars such as the names and 
contact details of the service providers proposed to be contacted, a brief 
explanatory note on the decision (in case less than five written quotations are 
invited) and the reasons for their selection. 
 

 
(e) 
After the necessary approval under (d) is obtained, a public officer not lower 
than the rank of Assistant Engineer or equivalent (for services for construction 
and engineering works) or Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive Officer II or 
equivalent (for other services) shall contact the service providers for 
quotations. 
 
 
(f) 
Where written quotations are invited, departments shall ask the service 
providers to return the quotations in sealed envelopes, or submit the quotations 
through e-Procurement System or other electronic procurement system where 
applicable, or by electronic mail/facsimile in cases where the receipt of 
quotations by electronic mail/facsimile has been authorised by the approving 
officers for the issue of invitation under (d) above, by a specific time.  A 
quotation opening team comprising two members, with the team leader at a 
rank not lower than that of Assistant Engineer or equivalent (for services for 
construction and engineering works) or Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive 
Officer II or equivalent (for other services), will open or vet the quotations 
received, and where applicable, date-stamp and initial the quotations.  All 
written quotations received should be properly documented. 
 
Acceptance of offer 
 
280.  (g) 
Provided that no less than five written quotations are received, public officers 
at the levels listed in column (A) of the table below are authorised to approve 
the acceptance of the lowest conforming offer or the conforming offer with the 
highest overall score (if a marking scheme is used).  In cases where (i) less 
than five written quotations are received; (ii) less than five written quotations 
have been invited in accordance with SPR 280(d); or (iii) a higher conforming 
offer or a conforming offer not obtaining the highest overall score (if a 
marking scheme is used) is to be accepted under exceptional circumstances 
with full justifications, the approving authority is listed in column (B) of the 
table below — 
 

 
 
 
 
Approving Officer 
Value of the 
(not lower than the rank of) 
Purchase 
  
(A) 
(B) 
  (i) 
not 
exceeding 
 
 
20% of the 
quotation limit 
set out in 
 
  
SPR 
220(a) 
Supplies 
Officer/ 
Senior Supplies Officer/ 
Executive Officer I or Senior Executive Officer 
equivalent 
or equivalent 
 
 
 
 
SPR 220(b) 
Engineer or equivalent 
Senior Engineer or 
 
equivalent 
 
  (ii) 
not 
exceeding 
 
 
50% of the 
quotation limit 
set out in 
 
 
 
SPR 220(a)  
Senior  Supplies  Officer/  Chief Supplies Officer/ 
Senior Executive Officer Chief Executive Officer or 
or equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
  
SPR 
220(b) 
Senior 
Engineer 
or 
Chief Engineer or 
equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
 
 
(iii) 
up to the 
 
 
quotation limit 
set out in 
 
  
SPR 
220(a) 
Chief Supplies Officer/ D1 or equivalent 
(i), (ii) and (iv)  Chief Executive Officer or   
equivalent 
 
  
SPR 
220(a) 
D1 or equivalent 
D2 or equivalent 
(iii) 
 
   
SPR 
220(b)  Chief Engineer or 
Government Engineer or 
equivalent 
equivalent 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(h) 
Except for procurement of services made through purchasing cards and 
e-purchases made by placing e-orders or as provided in SPR 290, departments 
shall use Departmental Order for Provision of Services (GF 220) or a Letter of 
Acceptance, as appropriate, for ordering services. 
 

Urgent minor purchases 
 

290.  (a) 
Public officers may make minor purchases of services in cash or through 
purchasing cards to meet immediate needs, provided that the value of services 
does not exceed $5,000 and the authorising officer not lower than the rank of 
Assistant Engineer or equivalent (for services for construction and 
engineering works) or Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive Officer II or 
equivalent (for other services) is satisfied that such purchases are essential and 
the rates obtained are reasonable and certifies this on file.  For payments made 
in cash, the cost of such purchases will be reimbursed from a departmental 
imprest account.  When claiming reimbursement, public officers shall use a 
Claim for Reimbursement of Expenses (GF 51).  For these purchases, 
departments do not need to issue covering orders, but shall maintain a copy of 
the GF 51 issued for audit purpose. 
 
 
(b) 
Public officers not lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies Officer/Executive 
Officer II or equivalent may make purchases of services to meet departmental 
needs while on official visits outside Hong Kong, provided that the total value 
of the purchase does not exceed $25,000.  Public officers making such 
purchases shall follow the same reimbursement procedure described in 
SPR 290(a). 
 
 
PROCUREMENT OF REVENUE CONTRACTS BY DEPARTMENTS 
 
295.  (a) 
Departments shall follow the provisions set out in these Regulations for 
procurement of revenue contracts with a value not exceeding the quotation 
limit stated in SPR 220(a).  When preparing specifications, departments may 
make reference to the Guidelines for Drawing Up Tender Specifications at 
Appendix III(F), where appropriate.   
 
 
 
Authorisation and control 
 
 
 
295. (b)  For procuring revenue contracts with a value not exceeding $50,000
departments should normally invite more than one potential bidder for 
quotations, and accept the highest conforming offer or the conforming offer 
with the highest overall score (if a marking scheme is used).  Departments 
shall designate public officers of not lower than the rank of Supplies 
Supervisor II or equivalent to handle the selection of potential bidders and to 
contact them for quotations.  Public officers contacting potential bidders for 
quotations shall record on file the particulars such as the names and contact 
details of the potential bidders contacted and details of the quotations received 
for audit purpose.  The acceptance of an offer can only be approved by a 
public officer of not lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies 
Officer/Executive Officer II or equivalent.  This public officer shall certify on 
file that the rates or amounts quoted are reasonable. 
 

 (c) 
For procuring revenue contracts with a value exceeding $50,000 but not 
exceeding the quotation limit stated in SPR 220(a)
, departments should 
invite written quotations from not less than five potential bidders.  For the 
purpose of this Chapter, written quotations by electronic mail, facsimile or 
post are accepted.  Departments shall follow the same procedures for the 
procurement of services (excluding services for construction and engineering 
works) as laid down in this Chapter. 
 
QUOTATION NEGOTIATIONS 
 
296.   
Where it would be in the Government’s interest to negotiate with a bidder or 
bidders in a quotation exercise, such negotiations should be conducted in a non-discriminatory 
manner.  The approving officers specified in SPR 260(g) or SPR 280(g) may approve the 
initiation of the quotation negotiations if it is justified to do so.  The acceptance of the 
negotiated outcome should be approved by public officers at least one rank higher than the 
officers approving the initiation of negotiation.  Some guidelines on preparing for and 
conducting negotiations are provided at Appendix III(J) for general reference.  They are not 
intended to be comprehensive. 
 
CANCELLATION OF QUOTATION EXERCISE 
 
297.   
The approving officers specified in SPR 260(g) or SPR 280(g) may approve 
the cancellation of the quotation exercise if it is justified to do so.  The reasons for 
cancellation (such as no conforming offer received, the contract sum of recommended offer 
exceeds the quotation limit, or other reasons on grounds of public interest) should be recorded 
for audit purpose.  Approval for cancellation of a quotation exercise is not required when no 
offer is received after the close of quotation invitation. 
 
EXCEPTIONAL AUTHORISATION 
 
298.   
In very exceptional cases, PS(Tsy) may authorise departments to make 
purchase of stores not in accordance with the requirements in this Chapter.  For purchases of 
stores not in accordance with SPR 245-265, departments shall submit the requests through the 
DGL, who will forward them with his recommendations to PS(Tsy).  

CHAPTER III 
 
TENDER PROCEDURES 
 
SCOPE AND COVERAGE 
 
300.  (a) 
The tender procedures set out in these Regulations shall be followed for 
procurement and disposal of stores, services, construction/engineering works 
and other items as well as for revenue contracts, with the exception of the 
following for which separate procedures shall apply — 
 
 
 
(i) 
procurement of stores, services and revenue contracts not exceeding the 
quotation limits specified in SPR 220.  Quotation procedures are 
applicable; 
 
 
 
(ii)  franchises, concessions, leases, licences, tenancies and other items 
procured and disposed of by public auction or method laid down by 
statute, Government Regulations, or administrative procedure agreed by 
the PS(Tsy); 
 
 
 
(iii)  private treaty grants, exchanges, extensions and short-term tenancies of 
land under the approved “Abbreviated Tender System”; 
 
 
 
(iv)  procurement of consultancy services through quotation and consultants 
selection procedures in Chapters II and IV respectively; 
 
 
 
(v)  direct engagement of contractors/suppliers/service providers without 
recourse to tender procedures specified in SPR 331-333;  
 
 
 
 
 
 
(vi)  briefing out of legal work by the Secretary for Justice; and 
 
 
 
(vii)  employment of individual persons. 
 
 
(b) 
Where procurements are covered by WTO GPA and hence are subject to 
additional requirements, these are separately specified.  Departments shall 
comply with the requirements of WTO GPA and related circulars/guidelines 
(as may be updated from time to time) which can be viewed at 
http://portal.ccgo.hksarg/en/ia/DisplayIAByCat.jsf?cat=3766#3766 
 
In 
estimating the value of a procurement for the purpose of ascertaining whether 
it is a procurement covered by WTO GPA, departments shall include the 
estimated maximum total value of the procurement over its entire duration, 
whether awarded to one or more contractors/suppliers/service providers, taking 
into account all forms of remuneration. 
 
CLASSIFICATION OF INFORMATION 
 
305.   
Information relating to tenders and contracts should be handled in the 
following manner — 
 

 
(a) 
All communications regarding tenders, from the time tender documents are 
prepared until a decision is made on the acceptance or otherwise of the 
tenders, must be classified as RESTRICTED (TENDER).  Correspondence on 
prequalification and single/restricted tendering should also be classified as 
RESTRICTED (TENDER). 
 
 
(b) 
Contract documents and communications regarding contracts do not usually 
have a security classification.  RESTRICTED will be an adequate 
classification for sensitive information relating to contract disputes, litigation, 
claims, etc.  Information should only be classified as CONFIDENTIAL if its 
disclosure would be prejudicial to the interest of the Government of the Hong 
Kong Special Administrative Region (HKSAR). 
 
 
(c) 
COs and Chairmen of Tender Boards shall appoint public officers to open and 
handle classified correspondence relating to tenders and contracts on a 
need-to-know basis.  Detailed instructions on the procedures for handling such 
correspondence shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the 
Security Regulations. 
 
TENDER BOARDS AND OTHER APPROVING AUTHORITIES 
 
310.  (a) 
The Financial Secretary/SFST appoints the Central Tender Board (CTB), and 
has authorised PS(Tsy) to appoint subsidiary tender boards and COs to appoint 
DTCs each comprising not less than three persons to consider and decide on 
the acceptance of tenders or to advise on the acceptance of tenders up to the 
approved financial limits.  The relationship amongst CTB, subsidiary tender 
boards and DTCs is provided in SPR 116. 
 
 
(b) 
The CTB advises the PS(Tsy) on the acceptance of all tenders exceeding the 
financial limits of subsidiary tender boards.  The CTB also advises or decides 
on matters concerning tenders, contracts and subsidiary tender boards 
generally in accordance with its terms of reference.  In the case of serious 
disagreement among members of the CTB on the award of a contract, the 
Chairman, in his discretion, may refer the matter to the Financial 
Secretary/SFST for advice.  
 
 
(c) 
In seeking advice or approval of the CTB (concerning, for example, tender 
reports, the use of a marking scheme for works contracts, deviation from the 
SMS Framework for the procurement of stores, services (excluding works 
contracts) and revenue contracts, or the conduct of prequalification exercise 
and the list of prequalified tenderers), departments shall send seven copies of 
the submission and the original copy to the Secretary, CTB.  Submissions to 
the CTB must be signed or endorsed by the respective CO or his representative 
at directorate level.  The CO concerned or his representative at directorate 
level may be requested or may himself request to attend CTB’s meeting to 
present his recommendations or to answer any queries that the CTB may have 
(see also SPR 375). 
 

 
(d) 
There are currently two subsidiary tender boards, viz. the GLD Tender Board 
and the Public Works Tender Board.  If there is a division of opinion on a 
contract award between members of a subsidiary tender board, the Chairman 
of the concerned subsidiary tender board should refer the matter to the CTB 
for advice.  Subsidiary tender boards shall submit to the CTB at the end of the 
month concerned details of all contract awards where the lowest conforming 
offer (highest in the case of revenue contract), or the tender of the highest 
overall scorer in case a marking scheme is used in tender evaluation, has not 
been accepted and the reasons for making such awards. 
 
 
(e) 
Up-to-date information on the membership and terms of reference of the CTB 
and subsidiary tender boards is published in the Civil and Miscellaneous Lists 
of the Government of the HKSAR, which can be viewed at the website 
<http://www.info.gov.hk/cml/eng/cbc/c23.htm>. 
 
 
(f) 
COs shall establish in their departments a DTC consisting of not less than 
three persons and chaired by a directorate officer not lower than D2 rank who 
shall be at least one rank higher than the chairman of the TAP set up for that 
particular tender exercise to consider or decide on the acceptance of tenders 
for procurements within the financial limits specified in SPR 116. 
 
 
 
 
(g) 
If there is a division of opinion on a contract award between members of a 
DTC, the Chairman of the concerned DTC may refer the matter to his CO for 
ruling.  DTCs shall submit to the relevant tender board at the end of the month 
concerned details of all contract awards where the lowest conforming offer 
(highest in the case of revenue contract), or the tender of the highest overall 
scorer in case a marking scheme is used in tender evaluation, has not been 
accepted and the reasons for making such awards. 
 
 
 
 
(h) 
COs are delegated the authority to personally approve — 
 
 
 
(i) 
the award of all works contracts not exceeding $30 million each and not 
subject to WTO GPA; and 
 
 
 
(ii) 
the award of works contracts above $30 million but not exceeding 
$55 million each and not subject to WTO GPA provided they are 
awarded to the lowest conforming bidder or the highest overall scorer. 
 
TYPES OF TENDERING 
 
315.   
Departments should normally adopt open tendering for invitation of tenders. 
Under special circumstances and where approval from the concerned authorities have been 
obtained, departments may invite tenders in any of the alternative ways, namely selective 
tendering, single/ restricted tendering or prequalified tendering as provided for in 
SPR 320-330 below. 
 
Open tendering 
 
316.   
All interested contractors/suppliers/service providers are free to submit their 
tenders.  Procedures and requirements on publications of tender notice for open tendering are 
set out in SPR 340. 
 

Selective tendering 
 
320.  (a) 
Selective tendering is adopted when contractors/suppliers/service providers on 
the relevant approved lists of contractors/suppliers/service providers are 
invited to submit tenders.   
 
 
(b) 
It is a two-step, open bidding process which departments may establish lists of 
qualified contractors/suppliers/service providers for particular services or 
articles, where there is a frequent need to invite tenders for such services or 
articles but not all contractors/suppliers/service providers in the market are 
capable of providing the required services or articles. Normally, admission to 
the lists is accepted at any time and any contractor/supplier/service provider 
may submit an application.  A contractor/supplier/service provider who has 
submitted a request for participation in a tender exercise but is not yet on the 
approved lists shall not be excluded from consideration on the grounds that 
there is insufficient time to examine the application for admission to the 
approved lists, unless, in exceptional cases, due to the complexity of the 
procurement, the department is not able to complete the examination of the 
application within the time-period allowed for submission of tenders.  Notices 
of tender invitations should be published in the Government Gazette, on the 
Internet, and/or sent by letter to all contractors/suppliers/service providers on 
the relevant approved lists of qualified contractors/suppliers/service providers 
established for the purpose of selective tendering.    For procurements covered 
by WTO GPA, in addition to SPR 340(c), departments shall notify and provide 
the notice of tender invitation to the contractors/suppliers/service providers on 
the relevant approved lists of qualified contractors/ suppliers/service providers 
that will be invited to tender.  Detailed procedures and requirements on 
publication of notices of tender invitations are set out in SPR 340.  
 
 
(c) 
Except for the authority delegated for works contracts in (d) below, the 
PS(Tsy) is the approving authority for the establishment of lists of qualified 
contractors/suppliers/service providers for selective tendering.  When applying 
to establish such lists, departments shall set out the justifications and provide 
information on the source of prospective applicants, qualification criteria, 
assessment panel and method of assessment.  The qualification criteria and 
method of assessment shall not discriminate among foreign 
contractors/suppliers/service providers or between domestic and foreign 
contractors/suppliers/service providers.  For procurements covered by 
WTO GPA, the qualification criteria shall be limited to those which are 
essential to ensure that the contractors/suppliers/service providers have the 
legal and financial capacities and the commercial and technical abilities to 
undertake the relevant procurements.  In establishing the qualification criteria, 
departments shall not impose the criterion that, in order for a 
contractor/supplier/service provider to participate in a procurement, the 
contractor/supplier/service provider has previously been awarded one or more 
contracts by an entity covered by the WTO GPA, but may require relevant 
prior experience where essential to meet the requirements of the procurement. 
Departments shall seek the prior approval of the PS(Tsy) before revising the 
qualification criteria and method of assessment. 
 

 
(d) 
For works contracts, the approving authority for the establishment of the List 
of Approved Contractors for Public Works and the List of Approved Suppliers 
of Materials and Specialist Contractors for Public Works and for revising the 
qualification criteria and method of assessment of the lists has been delegated 
to the Permanent Secretary for Development (Works).  Departments shall 
follow supplementary procedures set out in relevant DEVB TC(W).  
 
 
(e) 
Departments establishing and maintaining approved lists of qualified 
contractors/suppliers/service providers for selective tendering shall publish a 
notice inviting interested contractors/suppliers/service providers to apply for 
admission to the lists in the home page on the Internet, which shall be posted 
continuously during the period of its validity.  Such notice shall include, 
among other things, a description of the stores or services, or categories 
thereof, for which the lists may be used, the period of validity of the lists, the 
qualification criteria, the method of application and assessment and the means 
for renewal or termination, where applicable.  A specimen is at 
Appendix III(A).  Approved lists shall be reviewed regularly to ensure that 
new applications are processed promptly and that contractors/suppliers/service 
providers who cease to be qualified are deleted from the lists.  In addition, new 
applications from contractors/suppliers/service providers for admission to the 
approved lists shall be allowed at any time and dealt with expeditiously. 
Departments shall promptly inform the contractors/suppliers/service providers 
of their decisions and, on request of the contractors/suppliers/service 
providers, promptly provide them with a written explanation of the reasons for 
their decisions.  Updating of the lists according to the approved qualification 
criteria does not require further approval from the PS(Tsy). 
 
Single and restricted tendering 
 
325.  (a) 
For single or restricted tendering (referred to as limited tendering under 
WTO GPA for which the conditions for invoking limited tendering are also 
specified therein), tenders are invited from only one or a limited number of 
contractors/suppliers/service providers.  Single or restricted tender procedures 
shall only be used in circumstances when open competitive tendering would 
not be an effective means of obtaining the requisite stores or services or for 
procuring revenue contracts.  They shall not be used for the purpose of 
avoiding competition among contractors/suppliers/service providers or in a 
manner that discriminates against non-local contractors/suppliers/service 
providers or protects local contractors/suppliers/service providers.  Examples 
that may justify the use of single or restricted tendering procedures include — 
   
 
 
(i) 
insofar as is strictly necessary where, for reasons of extreme urgency 
brought about by events unforeseeable by the procuring department, the 
stores, services or revenue contracts could not be procured in time using 
open tendering or selective tendering; 
 

 
 
(ii) 
where the requirement is for a work of art, or where for the protection of 
patents, copyrights or other exclusive rights, or due to an absence of 
competition for technical reasons, the stores, services or revenue 
contracts can be supplied or provided only by a particular 
contractor/supplier/service provider and no reasonable alternative or 
substitute exists; 
 
 
 
(iii)  where no tenders were submitted or no contractors/suppliers/service 
providers requested participation, or no tenders that conform to the 
essential requirements of the tender documentation were submitted, or 
no contractors/suppliers/service providers satisfied the conditions for 
participation, or the tenders submitted have been collusive, provided 
that the requirements of the single or restricted tendering do not 
substantially differ from the previous requirements of open or selective 
tendering; 
 
 
 
(iv)  where the procurement is for additional deliveries by the original 
contractor/supplier/service provider of stores or services that were not 
included in the initial procurement, and a change of 
contractor/supplier/service provider for such additional stores or 
services cannot be made for economic or technical reasons such as 
requirements of interchangeability or interoperability with the existing 
equipment, software, services or installations procured under the initial 
procurement, and that any change would cause significant 
inconvenience or substantial duplication of costs for the procuring 
department; 
 
 
 
(v) 
where the procurement is for purchasing a prototype or a first good or 
service that is developed at the request of the procuring department(s) in 
the course of, and for, a particular contract for research, experiment, 
study or original development.  Original development of a first good or 
service may include limited production or supply in order to incorporate 
the results of the field testing and to demonstrate that the good or 
service is suitable for production or supply in quantity to acceptable 
quality standards, but does not include quantity production or supply to 
establish commercial viability or to recover research and development 
costs; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(vi)  where services are to be provided by utility companies; and 
 
 
 
(vii)  where lease terms require that work must be executed by a particular 
firm. 
 
 
 
 
 
(b) 
Single or restricted tender procedures shall only be initiated with the prior 
approval of the following officers – 
 
 
 
(i) 
COs personally for stores, services (excluding works contracts and 
consultancy) and revenue tenders invited by the department within the 
departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a).  The same requirement also 
applies if departments choose to adopt single or restricted tender 
procedures for these procurements within the quotation limit; 
 

 
 
(ii)  DGL or his delegated officers for tenders arranged by GLD (GLD 
tenders); and 
 
 
 
(iii)  PS(Tsy) for tenders other than (i) and (ii) above. 
 
 
 
Requests for inviting single or restricted tenders for the supply of stores 
exceeding the departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a) other than through a 
GLD contract should be routed via the DGL, who will forward them, with his 
recommendations, to the PS(Tsy) for approval.   
 
COs should follow relevant guidelines set out in FC No. 2/2019 (as may be 
updated from time to time) in deciding whether single or restricted tendering 
should be initiated.  Requests for single or restricted tendering, irrespective of 
value, should be signed or endorsed by a public officer at directorate level. 
After obtaining approval for the initiation of single or restricted tenders, 
departments shall submit their recommendations to the relevant tender board/ 
DTC for consideration of the acceptance of tenders in accordance with the 
financial limits as set out in SPR 116. 
 
 
 
 
(c) 
Departments shall advise tenderers invited to tender under the single or 
restricted tender procedures to submit their tenders in the same manner as open 
or selective tender procedures.  Tenderers shall not be informed that tenders 
are being invited on a single or restricted basis.  Notices of tender invitation 
shall be sent by letter to the tenderers. 
 
 
(d) 
When seeking approval to adopt single or restricted tendering procedures, 
departments should — 
 
 
 
(i) 
describe the background of the case, the stores or services to be 
procured or the source of revenue; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
state the estimated cost or revenue; 
 
 
 
(iii)  explain why open tenders should not be invited; 
 
 
 
(iv)  if time constraint is the reason for proposing single or restricted 
tendering, explain why the tender exercise could not have been initiated 
earlier and why the additional time required for open tendering would 
harm the public interest; 
 
 
 
(v)  if a shortlist of contractors from whom tenders are to be invited is 
recommended, explain how the shortlist is drawn up, elaborating 
specifically on the criteria used for the shortlisting, and the professional 
capability and experience of all the contractors considered, including 
those not shortlisted; 
 
 
 
(vi)  obtain the support from the relevant policy bureau (for cases requiring 
approval from PS(Tsy)); 
 
 
 
 

 
 
(vii)  seek and attach the legal advice from D of J or Legal Advisory Division 
(Works) of DEVB (LAD(W)/DEVB) on the proposed single/restricted 
tendering from the WTO GPA perspective; and 
 
 
 
(viii)  advise on how it plans to procure the contract in the longer term. 
 
Prequalified tendering 
 
330.  (a) 
There may be circumstances which require the prequalification of a list of 
tenderers that are financially and technically capable of undertaking a 
particular project or supplying a particular product.  These include projects 
which require pre-testing of equipment to determine its suitability; projects of 
an extremely complex nature, high value or subject to very rigid completion 
programmes; projects which call for a high level of co-ordination, technical 
expertise, or a non-standard form of contract, e.g. Build-Operate-Transfer or 
specific types of Design-and-Build contracts; and products which are critical 
to the user departments. 
 
 
(b) 
PS(Tsy) approves, on the advice of CTB, for the use of prequalified tendering 
and the evaluation criteria for prequalifying applications.  A request for 
approval to conduct prequalification should contain all necessary information 
as shown in the format at Appendix III(B). 
 
 
(c) 
Invitations for prequalification shall be published in the Government Gazette. 
The invitation may also be published on the Internet, local press and selected 
overseas journals for the particular trade/product or any other means deemed 
appropriate.  Consulates and trade commissions in Hong Kong and known 
contractors/suppliers/service providers may be notified of the invitation by 
letter, where appropriate.  A specimen Gazette notice is shown at 
Appendix III(C).  For procurements covered by WTO GPA, please refer to 
SPR 340(c). 
 
 
(d) 
Applications may be received by the procuring department direct provided 
there are proper procedures for the receipt and registration of the applications. 
Procuring departments may also require applications to be deposited in the 
Government Secretariat Tender Box, in which case, the Secretary, CTB should 
be informed in advance and the closing time for submission of applications 
must be fixed as noon on a working Friday. 
 
 
(e) 
Having assessed all the applications according to the evaluation criteria 
previously endorsed by the CTB, the procuring department should make a 
recommendation to the CTB on a list of prequalified applicants from whom 
tenders will be invited.  The submission (in the format shown at 
Appendix III(D)) should contain an analysis of the strengths and weaknesses 
of all the applicants and detailed reasons why an applicant should be 
prequalified or rejected. 
 
 
(f) 
Notice of tender invitation shall be sent by letter to the prequalified tenderers 
and contain information as specified in SPR 340(e) and Appendix III(E), 
where applicable. 
 

 
(g) 
Any changes in the material particulars of the prequalified tenderers which 
occur between the prequalification and final tendering exercise will require the 
endorsement of the CTB.  Procuring departments shall advise prospective 
applicants in the prequalification document that the Government may permit 
changes to the status of a prequalified tenderer at its discretion and may 
disqualify a prequalified tenderer at any time prior to acceptance of the tender, 
if a prequalified tenderer has ceased to be able to meet the prequalification 
requirements. 
 
 
(h) 
Unless with the prior approval of PS(Tsy) who decides on the advice of the 
CTB, a prequalification exercise is conducted specifically for a particular 
project or product, and the list of prequalified tenderers will normally remain 
valid for one year. 
 
DIRECT ENGAGEMENT 
 
331.   
Direct engagement of a contractor/supplier/service provider without recourse 
to tendering procedures should only be used in circumstances when 
open/selective/restricted/single tendering would not be an effective means of obtaining the 
requisite stores or services or procuring revenue contracts, supported with very strong 
justifications.  Where the procurement under a direct engagement is covered by the WTO 
GPA, procuring departments should refer to Article XIII of the WTO GPA, and seek legal 
advice from D of J or LAD(W)/DEVB if in doubt on the application of the relevant WTO 
GPA provisions. 
  
332.   
The authority to approve the initiation of direct engagement and acceptance of 
offer under direct engagement rests with PS(Tsy).  For direct engagement of a 
contractor/supplier/service provider for the procurement of stores, services (excluding works 
contracts and consultancy) and revenue contracts not exceeding the departmental limit 
specified in SPR 220(a), this authority has been delegated to COs personally.  Requests for 
direct engagement, irrespective of value, should be signed or endorsed by a public officer at 
directorate level. 
 
333.   
In exercising the delegated authority, the approving authorities should observe 
relevant guidelines set out in FC No. 2/2019 (as may be updated from time to time).  When 
seeking approval to adopt direct engagement, in addition to those listed in SPR 325(d), as no 
bidding process is involved, departments should also include the contracting strategy having 
regard to the need to protect the Government’s interest and public perception, as well as 
negotiation strategy with the baseline position on the cost or revenue, if applicable. 

 
FUNDING 
 
337.  (a)    For works contracts funded under the Capital Works Reserve Fund, COs shall 
adopt parallel tendering, i.e. invite tenders before funding is secured, unless 
they consider, upon the conduct of risk assessment, that the benefits of parallel 
tendering (in terms of time saving, greater certainty in the Approved Project 
Estimate to be sought, etc.) are outweighed by the risks involved (in terms of 
abortive tendering work in case the approving authority does not approve the 
project concerned or impose conditions not envisaged in the tender, risk of 
Government being seen to be pre-empting Finance Committee/ Legislative 
Council, etc.).  For procurements of estimated value exceeding $30 million, 
prior approval from the relevant Directors of Bureaux (or Permanent 
Secretaries if authorised by the Directors in writing to do so) is required for 
exemption from parallel tendering. 
 
 
(b) 
For other contracts, COs may adopt parallel tendering, i.e. invite tenders before 
funding is secured, provided they are satisfied, upon the conduct of a risk 
assessment, that the benefits of parallel tendering (in terms of time saving, 
greater certainty in the Approved Project Estimate to be sought, etc.) outweigh 
the risks involved (in terms of abortive tendering work in case the approving 
authority does not approve the project concerned or impose conditions not 
envisaged in the tender, risk of Government being seen to be pre-empting 
Finance Committee/ Legislative Council, etc).  If the estimated value of the 
procurement exceeds $30 million, COs shall seek the prior approval of their 
Directors of Bureaux (or their Permanent Secretaries if authorised by the 
Directors in writing to do so) to adopt parallel tendering. 
 
338.   
When parallel tendering is adopted, COs must reflect correctly in such tender 
invitations that funding approval has not been obtained and remind tenderers that Government 
is not responsible for their costs of preparing the bids.  As a general principle, COs should not 
award a contract and should not indicate to the successful bidder that Government would 
accept its bid unless and until funding for that contract is secured.  Conditions for contract 
award are set out in FC No. 3/2020 (as may be updated from time to time). 
 
TENDER NOTICES AND TENDERING PERIOD 
 
340.  (a) 
Departments wishing to publish tender notices in the Government Gazette 
(normally published on Friday) shall follow the procedures set out in General 
Regulations 103-105, and forward three copies of the draft notice in Chinese 
and English by 3:30 p.m. on Tuesday to the Official Languages Division of 
Civil Service Bureau, which will forward them to the Assistant Clerk to the 
Executive Council after vetting the Chinese translation.  Departments should 
also send an additional copy of the notice to the DGL not later than 2:30 p.m. 
on Tuesday.  A specimen Gazette tender notice is at Appendix III(E).  Such 
notices should generally appear in two consecutive issues of the Government 
Gazette but can be published in more than two issues, if the procuring 
department deems appropriate.  
 

 
(b) 
Procuring departments may publish tender notices on the Internet, in the local 
and/or international press and journals or any other means deemed appropriate 
in addition to the Government Gazette.  For placement of advertisements in the 
press, departments should make arrangements with the Director of Information 
Services direct.   
 
 
(c) 
For procurements covered by WTO GPA, procuring departments shall publish 
the tender notices and the notices of invitations for prequalification in the 
Government Gazette.  They should also consider notifying consulates and 
trade commissions in Hong Kong of the tender invitations, where appropriate. 
 
 
(d) 
For works contracts not exceeding $55 million and other procurements which 
are not subject to WTO GPA, it would suffice to only publish tender notices 
on the Internet, as set out in FC No. 3/2009 (as may be updated from time to 
time).  Publication in the Government Gazette, and/or local and/or 
international press and journals is optional. 
 
 
(e) 
Tender invitations shall indicate clearly the name and address and 
telephone/fax number/e-mail address of the office from which forms of tender 
and further particulars may be obtained and other information necessary to 
contact the office and obtain the relevant tender documents, the exact location 
of the tender box in which tenders are to be deposited, and the closing date and 
time for the receipt of tenders.  For procurements covered by WTO GPA, 
departments will have to send to any interested tenderer a set of the tender 
documents upon receipt of a written request and may charge the tenderer for 
the cost of the delivery.  Tender notices shall specify whether the intended 
procurement is covered by WTO GPA.  Tenderers should be advised that late 
tenders or misplaced tenders by tenderers will not be accepted.  They should 
also be informed of the possible extension of tender closing date/time in the 
event of tropical cyclone signal No. 8 or above being hoisted, or a black 
rainstorm warning signal or “extreme conditions after super typhoons” 
announced by the Government being in force, or any possible scenarios of 
blockage of public access to the location of a tender box at the original tender 
closing date/time. 
 
 
(f) 
Adequate time shall be provided to allow both local tenderers and tenderers 
outside Hong Kong to prepare and submit tenders.  A minimum of three weeks 
is normally required.  As an exception, for works contracts not exceeding 
$55 million and other procurements which are not subject to WTO GPA, COs 
may allow a period of less than three weeks for the preparation and submission 
of tenders as set out in FC No. 3/2009 (as may be updated from time to time) 
provided that it is commensurate with the complexity of tenders and normally 
not less than ten days.  For procurements covered by WTO GPA, at least 40 
days shall be allowed for receipt of tenders and no less than 25 days for 
applications to be prequalified to tender.  In the case of extreme urgency, 
departments will have to seek the prior approval of the PS(Tsy) for reducing 
the period for receipt of tenders.  This authority has been delegated to the DGL 
or his designated officers in respect of GLD tenders and tenders for the supply 
of stores not exceeding the departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a). 
 

 
(g) 
Tenderers must submit the required number of copies of tenders in a sealed 
cover.  Tenderers should be advised not to give any indication on the cover of 
their tenders which may relate them to a particular contractor/supplier/service 
provider.  Pre-addressed envelopes or labels for the return of tenders should, as 
far as possible, be provided to tenderers. 
 
TENDER DOCUMENTS 
 
345.  (a) 
Departments should normally use the following standard contract forms when 
inviting tenders — 
 
 
 
(i) 
Tender for the Supply of Goods (GF 230). 
 
 
 
(ii) 
Tender for Services (GF 231). 
 
 
 
(iii)  Tender for the Purchase of Articles or Materials from the Government 
of the HKSAR (GF 232). 
 
 
 
(iv)  Articles of Agreement and General Conditions of Contract for various 
types of works contracts. 
 
 
 
(v)  Standard Terms and Conditions (Tender for the Supply of Goods, 
Tender for the Provision of Services, Tender for Purchase of Articles or 
Materials from the Government of the Hong Kong Special 
Administrative Region) issued by GLD. 
 
 
 
(vi)  Standard Terms and Conditions for IT tenders for the design, supply, 
implementation and maintenance of IT systems issued by the Office of 
the Government Chief Information Officer. 
 
 
(b) 
When using standard contract forms to invite tenders, departments may delete 
or amend any clauses appearing on the forms by way of Special Conditions of 
Contract but only after consulting D of J or, in the case of works tenders, 
LAD(W)/DEVB.  In case departments consider that the standard contract 
forms are not suitable for use in their tender exercises even if amendments to 
the clauses are made, they may design and use their own non-standard contract 
forms to meet specific requirements of their contracts.  Departments must clear 
with the D of J or, in the case of works tenders, LAD(W)/DEVB regarding the 
terms and wordings of the non-standard contract forms before they can be used 
in tender exercises.  Reference may also be made to A General Guide to 
Outsourcing prepared by EffO (as may be updated from time to time) for 
guidance. 
 
 
(c) 
Departments shall ensure that a complete set of tender documents covering the 
following is issued to all tenderers — 
 

 
 
(i) 
Terms of Tender including the conditions which a tenderer has to 
observe when submitting a tender, the tender validity period, the 
currency to be used for the contract, the dates for the delivery of goods 
or services, any limitation on the means by which tenders may be 
submitted, etc. and where the tenders may be submitted by electronic 
means, any authentication and encryption requirements or other 
requirements related to the submission of information by electronic 
means; 
 
 
 
(ii)  General Conditions of Contract covering the conditions which the 
contractor has to comply with in executing the contract; 
 
 
 
(iii)  Special Conditions of Contract covering any conditions peculiar to the 
contract; 
 
 
 
(iv)  Offer to be Bound or Form of Tender; 
 
 
 
(v) 
tender specifications (see SPR 350); 
 
 
 
(vi)  bills of quantities or quantities required of the contract where 
applicable; and 
 
 
 
(vii)  detailed price schedules or schedule of rates where applicable. 
 
 
 
For procurements covered by WTO GPA, departments shall include the Note 
to Tenderers at Appendix III(E)1 in the tender documents.  For procurements 
that a trading fund is likely to take part in the bidding exercise, departments 
should include the Note to Tenderers and Condition of Tender at 
Appendix III(E)2 in the tender documents. 
 
 
(d) 
If a non-works contract has an estimated value exceeding $300 million, the 
department must send all the non-standard components of the tender 
documents, i.e. bills of quantities, particular specifications, special conditions 
of contract, to the D of J for vetting before the tender documents are issued to 
potential tenderers.  If the vetted documents require substantial amendments 
after they have been issued to tenderers, they should be legally vetted again 
before the tender addendum is issued or, as the case may be, the contract is 
awarded.  For a non-works contract with an estimated value not exceeding 
$300 million, the CO (or his designated officer(s) at the rank not lower than 
Chief Supplies Officer/ Chief Executive Officer or equivalent) may decide if 
legal vetting is required for the non-standard components of the tender 
documents.  If a department considers that the Special Conditions of Contract 
previously cleared with D of J pursuant to SPR 345(b) may be used with only 
insignificant and immaterial changes for a subsequent contract with an 
estimated value not exceeding $300 million, the CO (or his designated 
officer(s) at the rank not lower than Chief Supplies Officer/ Chief Executive 
Officer or equivalent) may decide if the Special Conditions of Contract with 
the said changes need to be legally vetted.   For legal vetting of works 
contracts, departments should refer to the relevant DEVB TC(W), memo or 
guidelines promulgated by DEVB. 
 

 
(e) 
Departments shall promptly make available tender documents to ensure that 
potential tenderers have sufficient time to submit responsive tenders and 
provide, on request, the tender documents to any potential tenderers.  COs may 
decide whether to recover the cost of the tender documents from the tenderers. 
 
ACCESS TO TENDER INFORMATION 
 

346.   
Departments may receive requests for tender information from time to time. 
As a matter of principle, departments must ensure that the disclosure of tender information 
will not undermine the integrity of the tendering system, and that the prevailing Code on 
Access to Information is observed.  Legal advice should be sought if in doubt. 
  
347.   
In responding to questions or requests by tenderers, departments should 
observe SPR 346 and the following guidelines – 
  
 
(a) 
normally, departments should not disclose the estimated contract value to the 
potential tenderers as it may become a guiding factor in the preparation of their 
tender proposals, which may be reduced or, of even more concern, expanded 
unnecessarily, thus undermining the principles of competition and value for 
the money.  If, however, the estimated contract value has been disclosed to the 
public, departments should, in all fairness, inform all potential tenderers 
known to the departments of the estimated contract value;  
 
 
 
(b) 
to facilitate submission of tenders, departments should respond to questions 
from tenderers in a timely manner.  Responses to tenderers’ questions should, 
as a general rule, be made within ten working days.  An interim reply should 
be issued if a substantive reply cannot be made within the above timeframe;  
 
 
 
(c) 
information essential in enabling a tenderer to submit a conforming tender 
(e.g. clarifications on the terms, conditions and specifications of tender) should 
be provided.  For fairness, departments should provide the same information to 
all potential tenderers known to the departments (or publish on department’s 
website in case of open tender) as soon as possible and in any case before the 
closing date for receipt of tenders; 
 
 
 
(d) 
a tenderer can be advised of any previous record kept of his performance as he 
is entitled to know and to make representations against any adverse comments 
likely to be reflected in the assessment made to the relevant tender board/DTC; 
 
 
 
(e) 
an unsuccessful tenderer is entitled to know the reasons why his tender was 
unsuccessful.  However, departments should ensure that the details provided 
do not touch on the tender information provided by another tenderer in 
confidence; and 
 
 
 
(f) 
any information relating to another tenderer could only be provided with the 
express agreement of the tenderer in question. 
 
 
348.   
For requests for tender information made by the public, departments may 
provide, under the principle of SPR 346,– 
   

 
(a) 
particulars of a contract, the category of tenderers invited to tender for the 
contract, and the closing date/time for receipt of tenders; and 
 
 
 
(b) 
the number of tenders received for a particular contract, the name of the 
successful tenderer, the accepted tender sum and the date of the award of the 
contract.  Information on the winning tender should only be provided after the 
contract has been executed with the successful tenderer. 
 
 
 
349.   
Under no circumstances should a department make available the following 
information to either a tenderer or a member of the public – 
 
 
(a) 
minutes of the tender board/ committee recording the deliberations made on a 
certain contract; and 
 
 
 
(b) 
the method statement and plan proposed by the successful tenderer to execute 
the contract, the financial position and technical capability of a tenderer and 
any information provided in a confidential manner by a tenderer without the 
express agreement of the tenderer. 
 
 
 
TENDER SPECIFICATIONS 
 
350.  (a) 
Departments shall ensure that tender specifications which define the 
requirements of the contract are drawn up in a manner which meets the 
government procurement policy and principles specified in SPR 106-109. 
Tender specifications shall not be prepared, adopted or applied and conformity 
assessment procedures shall not be prescribed with the purpose or the effect of 
creating unnecessary obstacles to international trade or to competition amongst 
the potential tenderers.  To encourage competition and minimise entry barriers 
(particularly for start-ups and Small and Medium-sized Enterprises (SMEs)), 
as a general rule, tenderer’s experience should not be set as an essential 
requirement in non-works tenders, irrespective of value.  If it is absolutely 
necessary, prior approval must be sought from the relevant tender board/DTC 
for procurements adopting marking schemes under tendering procedures, or 
public officers (normally at directorate level) designated by COs for 
procurements not adopting marking schemes under tendering procedures. The 
justifications for seeking exception from the general rule and the grounds for 
approval should be properly recorded.  Where appropriate, tenderer’s 
experience may be set as an assessment criterion in the marking scheme as a 
desirable feature. 
 
 
(b) 
When inviting tenders under whichever tendering mode, departments shall set 
tender specifications in easily comprehensible general terms based on the 
functional and performance requirements of the stores or services required, 
and not around the technical data of a certain model of the goods or equipment 
to be purchased.  There shall be no requirement for or reference to a particular 
trademark or trade name, patent, copyright, design, type, specific origin, 
producer, supplier or service provider, unless there is no other sufficiently 
precise or intelligible way of describing the procurement requirements and 
words such as “or equivalent” are included in the tender documents.  Where 
standards are referred to, departments shall use, where practicable, 
international standards. 
 

 
(c)  While specifications need to be comprehensive providing sufficient 
information for tenderers to formulate their bids, departments should guard 
against over-prescribing requirements.  Departments are also encouraged to 
adopt output- or performance-based, rather than input-based, specifications. 
Over-prescription or input-based requirements may perpetuate incumbent 
advantage inhibiting competition and leading to over-reliance on a single 
contractor.  It may discourage the participation of innovative tenderers who are 
able to deliver the contractual requirements with alternative methods or fewer 
resources than those proposed in the tender document, hence not conducive to 
obtaining the best value for money for Government. 
 
 
(d) 
Departments shall set out in tender document all requirements and evaluation 
criteria that will be applied in deciding on the suitability of tenders.   
 
 
(e) 
Departments are encouraged to conduct a market research or non-binding EOI 
exercise to better understand the goods or services likely to be available in the 
market, technological trends, number of potential bidders, etc., in particular for 
procurements involving mission-critical or high-value contracts, or contracts 
with poor tender response in the past procurement exercise, or the potential for 
innovation of the procurement needs to be further assessed,   Such information 
is useful to ensure proper design of the tender specifications including 
essential requirements in order to obtain responsive and competitive tenders. 
Some guidelines for drawing up tender specifications are provided for general 
reference at Appendix III(F). 
 
 
(f) 
When tenders are called for the execution of a project or the provision of 
services on the basis of a schedule of prices or rates, departments shall provide 
in the tender document some indication of the estimated quantity, value and 
scope of the contract and any other related information in order to obtain 
realistic and competitive tenders.  Likewise, tender documents for term 
contracts should provide details of quantities based on past contracts (if any). 
But in both cases, it should be made clear that such figures are quoted only for 
the reference of tenderers, and that the Government cannot guarantee that the 
requirements under the proposed contract will be comparable. 
 
 
(g) 
For term contracts involving a large number of items and for which it would be 
impracticable to state the approximate quantities, the schedule of items shall 
be pre-priced, enabling the tenderers to express their offers in terms of a flat 
percentage variation.  In such cases, tenderers shall be advised of the likely 
expenditure under the proposed or previous contract, with the proviso that the 
Government does not commit itself to the estimated expenditure under the 
proposed contract.  When the tenders received are subsequently evaluated, the 
same estimates and requirements as those of which tenderers have been 
informed in the documents shall be employed in calculating the estimated total 
value of each tender. 
 
 
(h) 
To ensure adequate room will be in place in the tender evaluation process to 
assess innovative suggestions, departments are encouraged to adopt marking 
schemes.  Marking schemes should be clear and objective so as to provide a 
level playing field for bidders and encourage innovative suggestions.  In 
formulating marking schemes, departments should bear in mind user-

friendliness and ensure that they are commensurate with the nature, scale and 
value of the tender concerned.  Departments should follow the Guidelines for 
Adopting a Marking Scheme at Appendix III(G) in formulating marking 
schemes.  For non-works tenders, COs should designate officers (normally at 
directorate level) to approve cases not using a marking scheme for tender 
evaluation.    
 
 
(i) 
For non-works tenders, departments should formulate marking schemes based 
on the SMS Framework promulgated in FC No. 2/2019 (as may be updated 
from time to time).  The normally allowed range of technical weighting is 
50%-70%, and that of the price weighting is 30%-50%.  Departments are 
required to reserve a minimum percentage of technical marks for assessing 
innovative suggestions as per FC No. 2/2019.  No prior approval from the 
relevant tender board/DTC will be required if marking schemes are formulated 
according to the SMS Framework.  Any deviation from the SMS Framework, 
such as adopting a technical weighting above 70%, or departing from the 
permitted range of marks for specified types of assessment criteria, will be 
subject to the prior approval from the relevant tender board/DTC before tender 
invitation.  However, for service contracts that rely heavily on the deployment 
of non-skilled workers, no exception will be allowed for adopting a technical 
weighting below 50%, or assigning lower than 25 marks (out of a total 
technical marks of 100) (i.e. 25% of the total technical marks) for the 
assessment criterion on “wages”. 
 
 
 
 
(j) 
For works tenders, unless authority has been specifically delegated to 
departments or there exists standard marking schemes for individual 
procurement set out in relevant DEVB TC(W) and guidelines, the use of a 
marking scheme or deviation from the standard marking scheme requires the 
prior approval of the relevant tender board.  When seeking approval for the use 
of a marking scheme or deviation from the standard marking scheme for 
individual procurements, departments shall provide a brief description of the 
contract/project to be procured, its estimated value, justifications for the use of 
the proposed marking scheme or deviation from the standard marking scheme, 
the respective weighting for technical and price assessment, the assessment 
criteria and their relative weighting with passing mark(s) if any. Departments 
shall follow guidelines on the use of standard marking schemes set out in the 
relevant DEVB TC(W) and administrative procedures relating to design and 
build contracts. 
 
 
 
 
(k) 
For tenders for service contracts that rely heavily on the deployment of non-
skilled workers, departments shall observe the guidelines promulgated in FC 
No. 2/2019 and FC No. 3/2019. 
 
 
(l) 
Departments should state in the tender documents the use of a marking scheme 
in tender evaluation with an outline of the evaluation criteria.  In line with the 
basic government procurement principle of transparency, departments should 
provide information (including descriptions of assessment criteria and their 
individual technical marks, passing marks (if any) set for technical assessment, 
formula to be used to calculate the technical/price scores, the technical to price 
assessment weighting, etc.) in the tender documents to facilitate tenderers’ 
preparation of competitive and quality tender submissions. 
 

 
(m) 
In case of re-tender, departments should, in the light of the degree of market 
competition in the past procurement exercises, review and refine the tender 
specifications as well as essential requirements and marking scheme with a 
view to encouraging competition. 
 
TENDERS IN FOREIGN CURRENCIES 
 
355.  (a) 
In general, contract sums for government contracts should be quoted and paid 
in Hong Kong dollars.  In order to avoid tenderers putting in an unreasonable 
amount of allowance in their quotations to cover exchange risks for the 
contract period, departments may allow tenderers to quote in foreign 
currencies subject to the following conditions — 
 
 
 
(i) 
the goods or equipment offered are manufactured outside Hong Kong 
and form a significant part of the contract or the estimated total value of 
the “overseas” element exceeds HK$500,000; 
 
 
 
(ii)  unless otherwise agreed by the department concerned, the foreign 
currency quoted must be the currency of the country supplying the 
goods or equipment, and more than one currency may be quoted if items 
from more than one foreign country are involved; 
 
 
 
(iii)  local materials and labour should be priced in Hong Kong dollars, 
which generally should include materials manufactured outside Hong 
Kong  but which require a substantial amount of further processing in 
the  HKSAR; and 
 
 
 
(iv)  services provided by personnel based outside Hong Kong and salaried 
in a foreign currency may be quoted in that foreign currency. 
 
 
(b) 
Tenders likely to cost HK$10 million or more cannot be quoted in a foreign 
currency, other than US dollars, unless with the prior approval of the PS(Tsy), 
who must be satisfied that a refusal to allow tenderers to quote in a foreign 
currency other than US dollars will significantly reduce the degree of 
competition in tendering to the detriment of the public interest. 
 
 
(c) 
For tender comparison purpose, quotations in foreign currencies must be 
converted to Hong Kong dollars.  The conversion is to be based on the selling 
rate of the relevant currency quoted by the Hong Kong Association of Banks 
on the tender closing date.  Tender boards/DTCs, in considering 
recommendations for the award of contracts, will also take into consideration 
any significant fluctuations in exchange rates after the tender closing date. 
Departments should state in tender reports the converted tendered sums based 
on the exchange rates of the tender closing date and the date of tender report 
and should indicate whether the ranking of the tendered sums has changed as a 
result of these two bases. 
 

TENDER DEPOSITS/ BONDS 
 
360.   
A tender deposit/ bond is not normally required.  Where a tender deposit/ bond 
is required as a pledge of the tenderer’s good faith (as in the case of revenue contracts), the 
tender documents shall specify the amount of the deposit/ bond and the methods of payment 
(whether by cheque, cashier order, a bond in the form of guarantee arranged by a bank and/or 
presentation of original receipts along with the tender) and refund.  The amount of tender 
deposit/ bond should not be excessive.  Tender deposits/ bonds will be refunded to 
unsuccessful tenderers without interest. 
 
CONTRACT DEPOSITS/PERFORMANCE BONDS 
 
361.   
Successful tenderers may be required to pay a contract deposit (in the form of 
cash) or submit a performance bond to the Government within a specified period before 
contract signing (rather than at the time of tender submission) as security for the due and 
faithful performance of the contract.  A performance bond may be in the form of a guarantee 
arranged by a bank, insurance company, or the parent company (which has been assessed to 
be financially capable) of the tenderer. 
 
362.  (a) 
For works contracts, departments should follow the guidelines on contract 
deposits and performance bonds laid down in the relevant DEVB TC(W). 
COs may adopt a flexible and pragmatic approach in considering whether 
contract deposit or performance bond or other options of performance 
guarantee is needed. 
 
 
(b) 
For non-works contracts, unless otherwise personally approved by the CO, 
successful tenderers are required to pay a contract deposit or provide a 
performance bond as follows — 
 
 
 
Contract value 
 
Contract deposit or 
performance bond* 

  (A) 
Stores 
contracts 
 
 
 
 
 
 
≤ $1.4 million 
 
 
Not required 
 
 
 
 
> $1.4 million 
 
 
2% 
  (B) 
Service 
contracts 
 
 
 
 
 
≤ $1.4 million 
 
 
Not required 
 
 
 
> $1.4 million and ≤ $15 million   
 
2% 
 
 
 
> $15 million# 
 
  2% if passes financial vetting 
  5% if fails financial vetting 
for low risk contracts 
  6% if fails financial vetting 
for high risk contracts 
 
Periodic financial vetting + 
closer contract monitoring 
needed for high risk and long 
duration contracts 
 

 
 
(C)  Revenue contracts 
  Not required but departments 
may conduct financial vetting 
and/or require contract deposit 
in individual cases if considered 
necessary. 
 
 
 
 
 
 

Expressed in terms of % of contract value.  The stipulated percentage should apply 
unless personally approved by the CO. 
 

Including contracts for supply of stores which require also the provision of services of 
a value exceeding $15 million. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(c) 
Requirements on contract deposit or performance bond shall be stipulated in 
the tender documents, including the amount required, the payment method and 
the rights of the Government to decide whether the guarantor is acceptable and 
to refuse the offer from any tenderer which fails to meet the Government’s 
requirements. 
 
 
(d) 
Contract deposits shall not be refunded until the contract has been completed 
according to the terms of the contract.  Likewise, performance bonds must be 
maintained in force until the contractor has duly performed all his obligations 
under the contract. 
 
RETENTION MONEYS 
 
363.   
To protect the interest of the Government, departments may include in the 
payment schedule for the contractor a right for the Government to hold back a certain sum as 
retention money, which will not be released to the contractor upon completion of the contract 
until the Government is fully satisfied, after a period of time, with the goods delivered or the 
service provided.  The amount of retention money is normally pitched at no more than 5% of 
the contract value.  For works contracts, departments shall follow guidelines in the relevant 
DEVB TC(W).  
 
RECEIPT AND CLARIFICATION OF TENDERS 
 
365.  (a) 
Tender opening procedures should commence immediately when the deadline 
for tender submission is due.  Except for tenders for procurements with a value 
not exceeding the departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a) received by 
departments which have set up their own tender boxes, one copy of the 
duplicates of the tenders received will be kept by the relevant tender board 
after the tenders have been opened and authenticated by the tender opening 
team.  The originals and the remaining duplicates of the tenders will be sent to 
the procuring department for assessment. 
 

 
(b) 
After receipt of the original tenders from the tender opening team, the 
procuring department should check that the tenders contain, inter alia, the 
names and addresses of all partners (if the tender is submitted by a partnership) 
or offices (if the tender is submitted by an unincorporated body) and the 
number of the business registration certificate (or documentary evidence 
showing that the tenderer is exempted from business registration under the 
Business Registration Ordinance (BRO) (Chapter 310)). 
 
 
(c) 
Where certain tender information is found missing or where a tender contains 
some ambiguities, qualifications or counter-proposals, departments should 
consider carefully whether to seek the missing information or clarification 
from the relevant tenderer.  In general, departments shall keep such post-tender 
closing contacts with tenderers to the minimum.  They shall record clearly and 
in full all such contacts.  Most importantly, they must ensure that such contacts 
will not give a tenderer any advantage or perceived advantage over other 
tenderers. 
 
 
(d) 
The opportunities that may be given to tenderers to correct unintentional errors 
of form (for instance, clerical errors) shall not be permitted to give rise to any 
discriminatory practice. 
 
 
(e) 
Where the provision of certain information is specified as an “essential 
requirement” in the tender documents and it is stipulated that non-compliance 
with it will render the tender non-conforming, the tender shall be considered as 
non-conforming if such information is not submitted.  Departments shall not 
approach the concerned tenderer for the missing information.  For instance, 
submission of an execution plan which will be taken into account in the tender 
evaluation is by its nature an essential requirement.  Hence, it should be so 
specified in the tender documents with the stipulation that any non-compliance 
of this requirement will render the tender non-conforming.  Where submission 
of certain information is not specified as an essential requirement but it is 
specified in the tender documents that failure to provide such information will 
render the tender non-conforming, the tender shall also be considered as non-
conforming if such information is not submitted. 
 
 
(f) 
Where the provision of certain information is not specified as an “essential 
requirement” in the tender documents and there is no stipulation that its non-
compliance will render the tender non-conforming, departments may approach 
the concerned tenderer for such missing information if it relates to factual 
information and there is no room for manipulation by a tenderer by virtue of 
late submission of such information.  In other cases, departments shall assess a 
tender with certain information missing as it is. 
 
 
(g) 
In approaching a tenderer for clarification, departments must not provide any 
information that may assist the tenderer to improve his tender to the level of 
tenders from other tenderers. 
 
 
(h) 
In case of special circumstances requiring different consideration, departments 
shall seek the advice of the D of J or, in the case of works tenders, 
LAD(W)/DEVB and/or the relevant tender board or DTC. 
 

 
(i) 
If a clarification or correction results in an adjustment of the tendered sum, the 
department shall ask the tenderer to confirm whether he is prepared to abide by 
the adjusted tendered sum.  If the tenderer refuses to so abide, the department 
shall consult the D of J or, in the case of works tenders, LAD(W)/DEVB on 
how to deal with the tender.  Under no circumstances may a department reject 
a tender as a qualified bid (expressly or otherwise) without the approval of the 
relevant tender board, except that for works tenders with a value not exceeding 
$55 million each which are not subject to WTO GPA and tenders for 
procurements with a value not exceeding the departmental limit specified in 
SPR 220(a), the authority to reject a tender as a qualified bid has been 
transferred to COs and DTCs respectively.  For works contracts, departments 
shall observe further guidelines on the clarification of tenders and correction of 
errors as laid down in relevant DEVB TC(W).  
 
EVALUATION OF TENDERS 
 
370.  (a) 
Tender evaluation should normally be conducted by a TAP consisting of not 
less than two persons.  Departments should observe the guidelines on the 
establishment and operation of the TAP set out in Appendix III(G)1.  For 
works tenders, departments should also follow the guidelines laid down in the 
relevant DEVB TC(W) currently in force issued by the DEVB. 
 
 
(b) 
The TAP shall examine tenders against the technical specifications, essential 
requirements, terms and conditions laid down in the notices of tender 
invitations and tender documents to determine whether they are fully 
conforming.  In recommending a tender for acceptance, the department should 
also take into account the following in the evaluation, as appropriate — 
 
 
 
(i)  technical and financial capability of the tenderers and their past 
performance records.  For works contracts, the guidelines laid down in 
the relevant DEVB TC(W) currently in force issued by the DEVB shall 
be followed.  For service contracts of a value exceeding $15 million, or 
contracts for supply of stores which require also the provision of 
services of a value exceeding $15 million, financial vetting shall be 
conducted of a tenderer who is being considered for the award of the 
contract in order to ensure that the tenderer is financially capable of 
fulfilling the contract requirements (see Appendix III(H));  
 
 
 
(ii) 
timely delivery or completion; 
 
 
 
(iii)  compatibility with existing or planned purchases; 
 
 
 
(iv)  after sale support and service including maintenance and spare parts 
provision, warranty and/or guarantees; 
 
 
 
(v) 
running and maintenance costs; and 
 
 
 
(vi)  fair market prices. 
 

 
 
Requirements (ii)-(iv), where applicable, should be included in the tender 
specifications.  In respect of requirement (v), departments should ask tenderers 
to provide an estimate of running and maintenance costs for the equipment or 
system supplied to enable a fair price comparison to be made. 
 
 
(c) 
Where a marking scheme is used in the evaluation of tenders, TAPs shall 
assess the tenders according to the criteria set out in the tender documents. 
Normally, the tender which attains the passing marks (if any) and the highest 
overall score under the marking scheme should be recommended.  The 
methods for evaluating technical and price proposals are set out at 
Appendix III(G). 
 
 
(d) 
In normal circumstances, departments shall determine the ranking of the 
tenders received according to the original tender prices or the adjusted tender 
prices made in accordance with SPR 365(i), or the overall scores they have 
attained when a marking scheme is used in tender evaluation.  Where price 
negotiations are undertaken under SPR 385, departments shall use the 
negotiated prices to determine the ranking of the tenders or their price scores. 
Departments may only consider other proposals on discounts by a tenderer if 
his tender is recommended for acceptance. 
 
 
(e) 
Any negotiation with a tenderer shall be undertaken in accordance with 
SPR 385.  Such negotiations may also be used to seek resolution of any 
qualification or counterproposal put forward by a tenderer and if the 
qualification seeks to reduce the tenderer’s risk or to construct payment terms 
which are more to his advantage, departments should seek a corresponding 
adjustment in the tender price before formally recommending the tender for 
acceptance. 
 
 
(f) 
In recommending the acceptance of a tender to a tender board or DTC, 
departments shall have value for money in mind.  If the tendered sums are very 
close or if the contract to be awarded involves payments over a number of 
years, e.g. interim payments to the contractor, the department shall compare 
the tenders by discounting future payments to obtain the present value.  The 
present value of the tendered sum should prevail in determining the ranking of 
tenders.  In assessing the present values of tenders, departments may approach 
the Management Accounting Division (MA Division) of Financial Services 
and the Treasury Bureau (The Treasury Branch) (FSTB) for advice. 
 

 
(g) 
If none of the tenders received is fully conforming with the technical 
specifications, essential requirements, terms and conditions laid down in the 
tender documents and/or attains the passing marks (if any) of the marking 
scheme, departments shall cancel the tender exercise (see SPR 380(e)) and re-
tender with revised specifications, essential requirements, terms and 
conditions, where applicable.  If exceptionally departments wish to 
recommend a non-conforming tender, they shall state clearly in the tender 
report any deviation of the recommended tender from the specifications, 
essential requirements, terms and conditions laid down in the tender 
documents, the assessment criteria under the marking scheme, and the reasons 
for so recommending.  As a general practice, departments should clear their 
tender recommendations with the D of J, or in the case of works tenders, 
LAD(W)/DEVB if they wish to recommend a non-conforming tender.  A copy 
of the relevant legal advice should be attached to the tender report for relevant 
tender board or DTC’s reference. 
 
TENDER REPORTS 
 
375.  (a) 
Departments shall prepare a tender report containing a clear recommendation 
in the standard format as at Appendix III(I).  Tender reports for consideration 
by the CTB and subsidiary tender boards must be signed or endorsed by the 
Head of Department concerned or his representative at directorate level. 
Tender reports for consideration by DTCs should be signed by the chairman of 
TAP of the procuring department.  For submissions to the tender boards, the 
originals of the tenders received should be submitted together with the tender 
report to the tender board as follows — 
 
 
 
(i) 
when the ranking of tenders is based on the tendered prices, i.e. no 
marking scheme is used in tender evaluation — 
 
 
 
 
if the recommended tender is the lowest (highest for revenue contracts), 
only the three lowest (highest) tenders should be submitted.  If the 
recommended tender is not the lowest (highest for revenue contracts), 
the lower (higher) tenders, the recommended tender and the next two 
higher (lower) tenders should be submitted; or 
 
 
 
(ii)  when the ranking of tenders is based on the overall scores, i.e. a 
marking scheme is used in tender evaluation — 
 
 
 
 
if the recommended tender is the highest overall scorer, only the tenders 
of the three highest overall scorers should be submitted.  If the 
recommended tender is not the highest overall scorer, the tenders of the 
higher scorers, the recommended tender and the tenders of the next two 
lower overall scorers should be submitted. 
 

 
(b) 
Departments shall forward sufficient copies of the tender report to the relevant 
tender board at least four weeks before the expiry of the validity of the 
recommended tender or before the intended commencement date of the 
contract to be awarded.  If there is a delay in putting forward a submission, 
departments must state the reasons in the tender report for not being able to 
submit on time.  Departments should forward their submissions to the relevant 
tender board at least five clear working days prior to a board meeting.  Failure 
to do so may result in submissions being deferred to a later meeting.  For 
submission to DTCs, departments should draw up their own departmental 
procedures. 
 
 (c) 
Tender 
boards and DTCs should normally meet to deliberate; decisions 
reached through circulation of papers should be the exception.  Subject 
colleagues are to attend meetings of tender boards and DTCs if requested. 
 
 
(d) 
For works contracts to be approved personally by CO in SPR 310(h), 
SPR 375(a)-(c) do not apply and COs may devise their own tender report 
formats.  
 
CANCELLATION OF A TENDER EXERCISE OR CONCLUDING A SERVICE 
LEVEL AGREEMENT WITH A TRADING FUND DEPARTMENT 
 
380.  (a) 
Unless it is not in the public interest to award a contract, a procuring 
department shall award the contract to the tenderer that the department has 
determined to be capable of fulfilling the terms of the contract and that, based 
solely on the evaluation criteria specified in the notices and tender 
documentation, has submitted the most advantageous tender or where price is 
the sole criterion, the lowest tender (or highest for revenue contract). 
 
 
(b)  Where a procuring department has invited a tender from 
contractors/suppliers/service providers in both the private and public sectors 
including department(s) of the Government whose services are funded under 
trading funds established pursuant to the Trading Funds Ordinance, Cap. 430 
(hereinafter referred to as “the relevant trading fund department”), and where 
the relevant tender board or DTC has accepted that the lowest or most 
advantageous tender is the one submitted by the relevant trading fund 
department, the procuring department shall — 
 
 
 
(i) 
enter into a service level agreement with the relevant trading fund 
department; and 
 
 
 
(ii) 
promptly inform all tenderers of its decision not to issue a “contract” in 
the “public interest” (in line with the requirements set out in 
Article XV 5. and Article  XVI 1. of WTO GPA, whether or not the 
tender is itself subject to the WTO GPA). 
 

 
(c) 
It is not possible to list out definitively and exhaustively all matters that 
contribute to “public interest”.  Other than the circumstances in (b) above, 
matters concerning the integrity, confidentiality, security and safety of the 
Government, and the effective use of government resources would be relevant. 
Relatively small sums of money saved and/or the retention of government staff 
can also be contributing factors that support “public interest”.  If in doubt, 
legal advice should be sought. 
 
 
(d) 
Approval of cancellation of a tender exercise is not required when no tenders 
are received after the close of tender invitation, or in the case of parallel 
tendering, if the relevant funding application is not approved by the Finance 
Committee of the Legislative Council before expiry of the tender validity or 
extended tender validity period (if applicable). 
 
 
(e) 
Other than the circumstances described in items (b) and (d) above, if a 
procuring department proposes to cancel a tender exercise once the tenders 
have been invited or not to award a contract following a tender evaluation, it 
shall seek the prior approval of the relevant tender board or DTC for the 
cancellation of the tender exercise following the report format set out at 
Appendix 
III(I).  Departments shall provide detailed justifications for 
cancelling a tender exercise and state whether and when a second tender 
exercise will be conducted.  For works contracts not exceeding $30 million 
each and not subject to WTO GPA, COs have delegated authority to 
personally approve the cancellation of a tender exercise. 
 
TENDER NEGOTIATIONS 
 
385.  (a) 
In general, it is the Government’s policy to procure stores, services or revenue 
contracts on the basis of competitive tendering, with the contract being 
awarded to the tenderer that conforms with the tender specifications and 
essential requirements, attains the passing mark(s) if a marking scheme is 
adopted, and offers the most advantageous terms to the Government.  Where it 
would be in the Government’s best interest to negotiate with a tenderer or 
tenderers, such negotiations shall be conducted in a non-discriminatory 
manner among different tenderers. 
 
 
(b) 
To facilitate negotiations, all notices of tender invitations shall contain a 
standard clause stating that the Government reserves the right to negotiate with 
any or all tenderer(s) about the terms of the tender. 
 
 
(c) 
PS(Tsy) is the approving authority for tender negotiations and has delegated 
this authority to — 
 
 
 
(i) 
subsidiary tender boards for negotiations on tenders which fall within 
their purview; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
DGL or his designated officers for negotiations on GLD tenders; 
 
 
 
(iii)  COs or their designated directorate officers not having been involved in 
the concerned tender exercises for negotiations on works tenders not 
exceeding $55 million each and not subject to WTO GPA; and  
 

 
 
(iv)  DTCs for negotiations on tenders for procurements not exceeding the 
departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a) which fall within their 
purview. 
 
 
(d) 
In addition to SPR 385(c), the PS(Tsy) has delegated the authority to COs or 
their designated directorate officers not having been involved in the concerned 
tender exercises to approve negotiations with potential 
contractors/suppliers/service providers for tenders of their own departments in 
any of the following circumstances — 
 
 
 
(i) 
when a single tender within the meaning of SPR 325 has been invited 
with the prior approval of the relevant approving authority; or 
 
 
 
(ii)  when only one tender or very few tenders have been received in 
response to an open tender invitation and the procuring department 
considers the tenders received may not be sufficiently competitive, 
whether in terms of price or other key quality attributes; or 
 
 
 
(iii)  when the tender price to be recommended is too high (or too low in the 
case of a revenue contract) in comparison with the price of similar 
procurement in the past or in relation to other market information; or 
 
 
 
(iv)  when the tender to be recommended contains counter-proposals to the 
tender terms which are disadvantageous to the Government but are not 
sufficiently substantial or do not cause substantial deviation from the 
requirements contained in the tender invitation to render the 
recommended tender non-conforming; or 
 
 
 
(v) 
when two or more tenderers have submitted conforming tenders which 
are equal in all aspects in terms of the evaluation criteria set out in the 
notice of tender invitation or tender documents and are equally the most 
advantageous to the Government. 
 
 
(e) 
Negotiations under items (d)(ii)-(iv) above shall normally be conducted only 
with the single conforming tenderer or with the conforming tenderer whose 
tender has been found to be clearly the most advantageous to the 
Government in terms of the evaluation criteria set out in the notice of tender 
invitation or tender documents.  Where no single tender is clearly the most 
advantageous in terms of the evaluation criteria set out in the notice of tender 
invitation or tender document or where the most advantageous tender cannot 
be determined until the counter-proposals have been resolved or withdrawn, it 
may be necessary to hold negotiations also with the tenderers who have 
presented the second or the third lowest (highest for revenue contracts) 
conforming tenders.  The criteria for selection of tenderers for negotiations 
shall be stated in the tender documents.  Where such criteria have not been set 
forth in the tender documents, the selection of tenderers for negotiations must 
be based on objective and reasonable criteria. 
 
 
(f) 
Where negotiations are conducted with more than one tenderer, whether or not 
under item (d) above, officers authorised to conduct the negotiations shall 
ensure that — 
 

 
 
(i) 
any elimination of tenderers participating in the negotiations is carried 
out in accordance with the evaluation criteria set forth in the notice of 
tender invitation or tender documents; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
should the procuring department introduce any modifications to the 
criteria or requirements set out in the notice of tender invitation or 
tender documents, the modifications must be transmitted in writing to 
participating tenderers in the negotiations and also in adequate time to 
allow such tenderers to modify and re-submit amended tenders, as 
appropriate; and 
 
 
 
(iii)  when negotiations are concluded, the remaining participating tenderers 
shall be provided with a common deadline to submit any new or revised 
tenders. 
 
 
(g) 
For the avoidance of doubt, price may be the subject of negotiations as it is an 
essential element in determining the strength and weakness of a tender.  Before 
negotiations are initiated, however, the procuring department shall take a view 
as to whether any reduction of price or increase in revenue that may be 
achieved would exceed the cost of undertaking the negotiations, or would 
adversely affect the quality of goods or services to be procured. 
 
 
(h) 
The public officers authorised by a CO to conduct negotiations shall be at 
directorate level, unless otherwise approved by PS(Tsy).  In the case of 
contracts awarded by GLD, the DGL shall determine the rank of the 
negotiating officers, having regard to the complexity and importance of the 
negotiations. 
 
 
(i) 
Public officers authorised to conduct negotiations shall, where necessary, seek 
the advice or assistance from the DGL on commercial aspects and the D of J 
on legal aspects. 
 
 
(j) 
For a high value or complex tender, negotiations shall be conducted by a team 
led by an experienced negotiator.  The negotiation team shall consist of the 
following, where applicable — 
 
 
 
(i) 
a member from the GLD for commercial aspects; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
a member from the D of J for legal aspects; 
 
 
 
(iii)  a member from the user department for user requirement aspects; and 
 
 
 
(iv)  a member from the relevant service department for technical aspects e.g. 
Office of the Government Chief Information Officer. 
 
 
(k) 
The negotiator and negotiation team shall be authorised in advance to commit 
the Government, if necessary, within limits set by the relevant tender board or 
DTC, or the concerned CO or the designated directorate officer authorising the 
negotiations. 
 

 
(l) 
Proper procedures, including keeping proper records of the negotiations, shall 
be established and adhered to.  Negotiations may be conducted by exchange of 
correspondence and/or meetings.  Under no circumstances shall negotiations 
be conducted orally by a single negotiator without the presence of another 
public officer of an appropriate rank. 
 
 
(m) 
In all cases, only public officers with no real or potential conflict of interest 
shall lead or participate in negotiations. 
 
 
(n) 
Some guidelines on preparing for and conducting negotiations are provided at 
Appendix III(J) for general reference.  They are not intended to be 
comprehensive. 
 
ACCEPTANCE OF TENDERS AND AWARD OF CONTRACTS 
 
390.  (a) 
Unless authority has been specifically delegated to departments or tender 
boards, the PS(Tsy) is the approving authority for acceptance of a tender. 
Subsidiary tender boards and DTCs are delegated with the authority to accept 
tenders under their purview and not exceeding the financial limits of the 
respective tender board and DTC.  After a decision has been made on the 
acceptance of a tender, the relevant tender board secretary will notify the 
procuring department by memorandum, copying it to the D of A.  Originals 
and duplicates of tenders will also be returned to the procuring department. 
For contracts awarded by DTCs or COs under delegated authority, the 
approving authority will notify the D of A of the acceptance of a tender. 
 
 
(b) 
The procuring department will then send a letter to the successful tenderer 
accepting his offer or, as the case may be, inviting him to sign the contract on 
a specified date.  The department should also notify unsuccessful tenderers of 
the outcome of their tenders and the contract award decision promptly, and 
include in the letters the reasons why their tenders were unsuccessful.  If the 
sum of the accepted tender exceeds the approved estimates, the CO concerned 
should ensure that it is not accepted before approval for an increase in 
commitment or project estimate has been obtained.  The letter should be 
copied to the secretary of the respective tender board or DTC. 
 
 
(c) 
Departments shall publish a notice of contract award in their home pages on 
the Internet and keep a record for all contracts awarded.  Departments shall 
separately (or additionally) keep a record of each contract awarded under 
single or restricted tendering as well as direct engagement of 
contractor/supplier/service provider, which shall include the name of the 
procuring department, the value and kind of goods or services procured and a 
statement indicating the circumstances that justified the use of single/restricted 
tendering and direct engagement.  For procurements covered by WTO GPA, a 
statement indicating the conditions described in the provisions on limited 
tendering in WTO GPA that justified the use of limited tendering should also 
be included for the purpose of meeting the specific reporting requirements of 
WTO GPA. 
 

 
(d) 
Tender boards, DTCs or the approving authority should send to the DGL a list 
of all the contracts awarded by them or on their recommendation in a 
particular month at least two weeks before the end of the following month for 
publication on the Internet. 
 
 
(e) 
Departments should follow the procedures set out in SPR 505-510 in accepting 
an offer and executing a contract. 
 

CHAPTER IV 
 
CONSULTANTS SELECTION PROCEDURES 
 
APPLICABILITY, SCOPE AND COVERAGE 
 
400.   
Consultants selection procedures should only be used to obtain services from 
consulting firms and in circumstances when tender procedures are not applicable, for 
example — 
 
 
(a) 
where problem solving is required in areas in which Government does not 
have the necessary expertise and qualified staff; 
 
 
(b) 
where the quality of the end product is dependent on the relevant experience, 
efficiency, capability, reputation, expertise and proposed method of approach 
and methodology of the appointed consultant; 
 
 
(c) 
where the qualities required of the consultant cannot be precisely specified or 
quantified; and 
 
 
(d) 
where the quality of service is of paramount importance in the selection and 
where selection by competitive tendering on the basis of price is likely to lead 
to a lowering of the quality of service. 
 
405.   
With the exception of the following for which separate procedures shall apply, 
departments should follow the procedures set out in these Regulations for the procurement of 
consultancy services — 
 
 
(a) 
procurement of consultancy services of a value not exceeding the quotation 
limit specified in SPR 220(a) whereby quotation procedures are applicable; 
 
 
(b) 
employment of individual persons; and 
 
 
(c) 
briefing out of legal work by the Secretary for Justice. 
 
APPROVING AUTHORITY 
 
410.   
Unless authority has been specifically delegated to departments and 
consultants selection boards, PS(Tsy) is the approving authority for appointment of consulting 
firms for the provision of consultancy services.  The procuring department is normally 
responsible for undertaking the procurement in accordance with these Regulations.  Before a 
proposal is made to appoint a consultant, the procuring department must obtain policy support 
from the relevant Director of Bureau or a public officer authorised by him for the employment 
of consultants.  The procuring department must confirm that qualified staff for the assignment 
are not available in the department or other parts of the Government or within the required 
timeframe.  The procuring department must obtain the endorsement of the MA Division of 
FSTB for the engagement of financial consultancies or non-financial consultancies with 
engagement of financial consultants as sub-consultants.  For general management 
consultancies, the procuring department shall obtain the support of EffO. 
 

416.  (a) 
For works-related consultancies funded under the Capital Works Reserve 
Fund, COs shall adopt parallel tendering, i.e. initiate consultants selection 
exercises before funding is secured.  The conditions and requirements as laid 
down in SPRs 337(a) and 338 equally apply. 
 
 
(b) 
For other consultancies, COs may adopt parallel tendering, i.e. initiate 
consultants selection exercises before funding is secured.  The conditions and 
requirements as laid down in SPRs 337(b) and 338 equally apply. 
 
CLASSIFICATION OF INFORMATION 
 
420.   
Information relating to the selection of consultants and consultancy agreements 
should be handled in the following manner — 
 
 
(a) 
all communications regarding the selection of consultants, from the time a 
short-list or a list of consulting firms for direct invitation of consultancy 
proposals is proposed until an agreement is executed, must be classified as 
RESTRICTED (CONTRACT); 
 
 
(b) 
consultancy agreements and communications regarding contracts do not 
usually have a security classification.  RESTRICTED (CONTRACT) will 
normally be an adequate classification for sensitive information relating to 
contract disputes, litigation, claims, etc.  Information should only be classified 
as CONFIDENTIAL if its disclosure would be prejudicial to the interest of the 
Government of the HKSAR; and 
 
 
(c) 
COs and Chairmen of Consultants Selection Boards shall appoint public 
officers to open and handle classified correspondence relating to bids and 
contracts on a need-to-know basis.  Detailed instructions on the procedures for 
handling such correspondence shall be made in accordance with the provisions 
of the Security Regulations. 
 
CONSULTANTS SELECTION BOARDS AND COMMITTEES 
 
425.  The Financial Secretary/SFST is the authority for the appointment of consultants 
selection boards, each consisting of not less than three persons and chaired by a 
directorate officer not lower than D2 rank.  The Financial Secretary/SFST has 
appointed the following - 
 
 (a) 
Central Consultants Selection Board (CCSB):  it advises the PS(Tsy) on the 
selection and appointment of all consultants, other than those selected and 
appointed by the AACSB, EACSB and DCSCs.  Departments shall follow the 
procedures set out in SPR 430-470 below on the selection and appointment of 
consultants within the purview of CCSB. 
 
 (b) 
AACSB:  it approves the selection and appointment of architectural and 
associated consultants for government projects other than those selected and 
appointed by DCSCs.  Departments shall follow the procedures set out in the 
Handbook on Selection, Appointment and Administration of Architectural and 
Associated Consultants published by the Architectural Services Department, 
and appropriate DEVB TC(W) on the appointment of architectural consultants. 
 

 (c) 
EACSB:  it approves the selection and appointment of engineering and 
associated consultants for government projects other than those selected and 
appointed by DCSCs.  Departments shall follow the procedures set out in the 
Handbook on Selection, Appointment and Administration of Engineering and 
Associated Consultants published by the EACSB, and appropriate 
DEVB TC(W) on the appointment of engineering consultants. 
 
 
Up-to-date information on the membership and terms of reference of the three 
consultants selection boards is published in the Civil and Miscellaneous Lists of the 
Government of the HKSAR, which can be viewed at the website 
<http://www.info.gov.hk/cml/eng/cbc/c23.htm>. 
 
 
 
426.  The SFST has delegated the authority to COs to approve the selection and 
appointment of consultants for consultancy assignments up to the departmental limit 
specified in SPR 220(a).  This delegation encompasses the authority to approve the list 
of consulting firms for inviting consultancy proposals, consultancy briefs, marking 
schemes for assessing consultancy proposals, pre-contract negotiations, appointment 
of consultants and cancellation of consultants selection exercises.   
 
COs shall appoint a DCSC in their departments consisting of not less than three 
persons to approve the selection and appointment of consultants for these assignments. 
The DCSC shall be chaired by a directorate officer not lower than D2 rank, who 
should be at least one rank higher than the chairman of the assessment panel set up for 
that particular assignment.  There should be clear segregation of roles and duties 
amongst the DCSC, the assessment panel and other departmental officers handling the 
procurement exercise.  Unless specified otherwise, departments should follow the 
relevant consultants selection procedures stipulated in SPR 430-470 below, the 
Handbook on Selection, Appointment and Administration of Architectural and 
Associated Consultants, the Handbook on Selection, Appointment and Administration 
of Engineering and Associated Consultants, FCs and DEVB TC(W), as appropriate. 
COs may also draw up the working procedures for DCSC, provided that these should 
adhere to the arrangements for the relevant consultants selection board and should be 
fair, transparent and defensible. 
 
 
427.  All marking schemes adopted for assessment of consultancy proposals should be 
approved by relevant consultants selection board/DCSC.  The technical weighting 
should normally be around 60%-70%, unless justified to the satisfaction of the 
relevant consultants selection board/DCSC.  
 
 
THE CENTRAL CONSULTANTS SELECTION BOARD PROCEDURES 
 
430.  (a) 
CCSB normally adopts a two-stage approval process as follows — 
 
 
 
Stage 1 approval :  approval for inviting consultancy proposals from the 
recommended firms and approval of the consultancy brief and method of 
assessing consultancy proposals; and 
 
 
 
Stage 2 approval :  approval for appointment of the recommended consulting 
firm, subject to the fees and other terms set out in the negotiating brief being 
resolved satisfactorily, where appropriate. 
 

 
 
Key steps are set out in SPR 440-445 below. 
 
 (b) 
The authority to approve a direct approach to a consulting firm without going 
through a competitive selection process rests with the PS(Tsy).  This authority 
is not delegated to COs irrespective of the value of the consultancy services. 
Approval would not normally be granted unless full justification is given to the 
satisfaction of the PS(Tsy).  In applying for such approval, the procuring 
department must justify the case for not conducting a competitive selection 
exercise and provide the necessary information including the scope of the 
proposed consultancy, the estimated cost and the required expertise of the 
recommended consulting firm.  After obtaining approval from the PS(Tsy), the 
procuring department shall approach the consulting firm direct, assess the 
proposal from the single consulting firm and forward a combined Stages 1 and 
2 submission to CCSB (for consultancy assignments exceeding the 
departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a)) or DCSC (for consultancy 
assignments not exceeding the departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a)) 
seeking approval of the recommendation to appoint the consultant subject to 
negotiation of fees and other terms, where appropriate. 
 
 
(c) 
Departments shall forward six copies including the original copy of the 
submission in the specified format to the Secretary of CCSB.  Departments 
should forward their submissions to CCSB at least seven clear working days 
prior to a board meeting.  Failure to do so may result in submissions being 
deferred to a later meeting.  At the discretion of the Chairman, CCSB may 
exceptionally deal with urgent papers by circulation or additional meetings. 
Requests for such exceptional treatment must be fully justified by the CO 
concerned. 
 
 
(d) 
Submissions must be signed or endorsed by the respective CO or his 
representative at directorate level.  He may be requested or may himself 
request to attend the CCSB meeting to present the recommendations of the 
submission or answer any queries that CCSB may have. 
 
List of consulting firms 
 
435.  (a) 
Departments may maintain lists of consulting firms for areas of work where 
there is a frequent need for consultancy services.  For example, the 
MA Division of FSTB maintains a list of accounting/financial/actuary firms 
and EffO maintains a list of management consulting firms.  Departments 
wishing to employ financial or management consultants may make reference 
to these respective lists for compiling a long list of consulting firms for 
short-listing purpose (if EOIs are invited) or for direct invitation of 
consultancy proposals (if EOIs are not invited). 
 
 
(b) 
Departments maintaining lists of consulting firms for the above-mentioned 
purpose should publish the lists and the method of application for inclusion in 
the lists on their webpages.  Such information should be kept on their 
webpages as long as it remains valid.  In addition, new applications from 
consulting firms for inclusion in the lists should be allowed at any time and 
such applications should be processed expeditiously. 
 

Stage 1 approval 
 
440.   
The procuring department should complete the following steps leading to 
submission to CCSB for Stage 1 approval — 
 
 (a) 
compile a long list of consulting firms which should be approached for an EOI 
to provide the consultancy services or for direct invitation of consultancy 
proposals if EOIs are not invited.  Departments may compile this list by 
reference to the lists maintained by the relevant departments under SPR 435(a) 
or through a general advertisement in the press and/or on the Internet; 
 
 (b) 
consider inviting EOI or inviting consultancy proposals direct from the long 
list if it is considered in the best interest of the Government.  Departments 
should have regard to the following factors - 
 
 
 
(i) 
availability of expertise sought – if the expertise sought from the 
consultant is widely available, an EOI exercise will help screen out the 
less competitive ones and save the consulting firms from having to 
incur undue time and resources to prepare the proposals.  If the 
expertise sought is highly specialised, a direct invitation of consultancy 
proposals may be more time- and cost-effective; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(ii) 
market reaction – if it is not clear whether the market is keen to offer or 
capable of offering the required expertise, or deliver the advice within 
the anticipated time frame, an EOI exercise may help ascertain market 
interest; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(iii)  urgency – if the consultant needs to be on board within a short time 
frame, a direct invitation of consultancy proposals may be preferred; 
 
 
 
 (c) 
establish an assessment panel which should normally comprise only 
government officials in order to safeguard the integrity of the consultant 
selection exercise.  It should be chaired by a directorate officer of the 
department, with other public officers of the department and representatives of 
the relevant policy bureau, resource bureau and the relevant 
service/professional departments, e.g. EffO, Office of the Government Chief 
Information Officer, Electrical and Mechanical Services Department (EMSD), 
as necessary, and endorse the list of consulting firms for direct invitation of 
consultancy proposals or determine the short-listing criteria if EOI are invited. 
The short-listing criteria should be limited to those which are essential to 
ascertaining the consulting firms’ ability to provide the required services. 
Guidelines on assessment panel are set out at Appendix III(G)1; 
 

 (d) 
if short-listing is considered necessary, invite  EOI from the long list of 
consulting firms and where appropriate, through advertising in the press and/or 
on the Internet.  In the invitation, procuring departments should provide the 
objective, scope and timing of the consultancy, and expertise/experience of the 
consulting firm as well as experience/qualifications of the consulting team 
required to undertake the consultancy. Consulting firms should normally be 
asked to provide up-to-date information on their experience/expertise and the 
experience/qualifications of their proposed team, and should not be asked to 
submit consultancy proposals at this stage.  Procuring departments should 
generally allow no less than two weeks for consulting firms to respond; 
 
 (e) 
the assessment panel shall assess the suitability of the consulting firms and 
their proposed consulting teams on the basis of the pre-determined 
short-listing criteria.  All consulting firms meeting the criteria should be 
short-listed to ensure competition in the selection process; 
 
 (f) 
prepare a draft consultancy brief and clear it with the D of J and relevant 
departments such as EffO and MA Division of FSTB, if necessary.  A 
consultancy brief normally covers the objective and scope of the consultancy, 
expertise/experience of the consulting firm as well as experience/qualifications 
of the consulting team required to undertake the consultancy, duties of the 
consulting team, duration and timeframe for the consultancy, information 
required for the consultancy proposals (including composition of the 
consulting team and proposed approach and method), method of assessing the 
consultancy proposals, controls of the consultancy in various aspects 
(including the government representative to whom the consulting team will 
report, whether and how to deal with change of staff of the consulting team 
during the consultancy period, and employment of sub-consultants), 
deliverables for each phase of the consultancy, the payment schedule and other 
related terms and conditions, and any special features of the consultancy 
agreement; 
 
 
(g) 
decide the essential or desirable requirements in terms of for example 
experience/qualifications of the consulting team for undertaking the 
consultancy, and design the marking scheme for assessment of consultancy 
proposals under Stage 2 including, the weighting for technical and fee 
assessment for evaluating the cost-effectiveness of consultancy proposals, the 
assessment criteria and their relative weighting with passing marks (if any) for 
assessing technical proposals and the methodology for scoring fee proposals. 
The assessment criteria should generally relate to the information required to 
be provided by the consulting firms for evaluation.  The technical weighting 
should normally be around 60%-70%, unless justified to the satisfaction of 
CCSB; and 
 
 (h) 
make a Stage 1 submission to CCSB seeking approval from the PS(Tsy) for 
inviting consultancy proposals from the recommended firms, the consultancy 
brief and method of assessing the consultancy proposals.  A specimen 
submission for Stage 1 approval is at Appendix IV(A). 
 

Stage 2 approval 
 
445.   
Upon Stage 1 approval, the procuring department should complete the 
following steps leading to submission to CCSB for Stage 2 approval — 
 
 (a) 
issue the approved consultancy brief to invite consultancy proposals from the 
consulting firms.  Procuring departments should generally allow no less than 
three weeks for the consulting firms to respond.  Consulting firms should 
submit technical and fee proposals in separate sealed envelopes with the words 
“Technical Proposal” or “Fee Proposal” clearly marked on the outside of the 
concerned envelope.  Procuring departments should require the consulting 
firms to submit their fee proposals either on a fixed lump sum or time charge 
basis.  Where time charge payment is used, consulting firms should be asked 
to cap their fee proposals so as to enable a fair cost comparison to be made 
(see also SPR 465). 
 
 
 
Normally, departments should not disclose the estimated contract value to the 
consulting firms as it may become a guiding factor in the preparation of their 
proposals which may be reduced or, of even more concern, expanded 
unnecessarily thus undermining the principles of competition and value for 
money.  If, however, the estimated contract value has been disclosed to the 
public, procuring departments should, in all fairness, inform all consulting 
firms of the estimated contract value; 
 
 (b) 
invite the consulting firms to a briefing before the closing date for submission 
of consultancy proposals, if necessary.  In the process leading up to the 
submission of consultancy proposals, procuring departments should provide all 
consulting firms with the same information to help them prepare their 
proposals.  After receipt of consultancy proposals and in the course of 
evaluation, procuring departments may invite the consulting firms to make a 
verbal presentation and to clarify any point in their consultancy proposals. 
Normally, the assessment panel should score the consultancy proposals after 
the presentation; 
 
 (c) 
the assessment panel should complete the technical assessment first 
according to the approved marking scheme and assessment criteria.  Under no 
circumstances should procuring departments alter the marking scheme or 
assessment criteria without first obtaining CCSB’s agreement; 
 
 (d) 
open the fee proposals only after completion of the technical assessment, and 
score the fee proposals in accordance with the pre-determined methodology. 
Procuring departments should follow the methods for evaluating technical and 
fee proposals for tenders given at Appendix III(G) in the evaluation of 
consultancy proposals from the consulting firms; 
 
 (e) 
evaluate the cost-effectiveness of the consultancy proposals by applying the 
pre-determined weighting given to the technical and fee assessments. 
Normally, procuring departments should recommend the consulting firm with 
the highest overall score; 
 

 (f) 
prepare, where applicable, a negotiating brief listing details of fees, and terms 
and conditions of the appointment which need to be resolved with the 
recommended firm; and 
 
 (g) 
make  a Stage 2 submission to CCSB seeking approval to appoint the 
recommended firm, subject to the fees and other terms set out in the 
negotiating brief being satisfactorily resolved, where appropriate.  Procuring 
departments should also recommend for CCSB’s approval in the Stage 2 
submission a fall-back option in the event that agreement cannot be reached 
with the recommended firm.  A specimen submission for Stage 2 approval is at 
Appendix IV(B). 
 
Pre-contract negotiations 
 
455.  (a) 
Upon notification of Stage 2 approval by the Secretary, CCSB who should 
copy the notification memorandum to the D of A, the procuring department 
should conduct negotiations with the recommended firm, where applicable
Unless authority has been specifically delegated to departments, the PS(Tsy) is 
the approving authority for pre-contract negotiations in all procurement of 
consultancy services subject to the CCSB procedures.  Unless otherwise 
approved by the PS(Tsy), the public officer authorised to conduct such 
negotiations with the recommended firm should be at directorate level. 
Procuring departments should seek advice or assistance from the D of J on 
legal aspects or other departments with the relevant expertise such as EffO, 
where necessary. 
 
 
(b) 
For a high value or complex contract, departments should consider appointing 
a negotiating team led by an experienced public officer.  A negotiating team 
may consist of the following — 
 
 
 
(i) 
a member from the D of J for legal aspects; 
 
 
 
(ii)  a member from the procuring department for user requirement aspects; 
and 
 
 
 
(iii)  a member from the relevant service/professional department for 
technical aspects, e.g. EffO and Office of the Government Chief 
Information Officer, if necessary. 
 
 
(c) 
The negotiator and the negotiating team should be authorised in advance to 
commit Government, if necessary, within limits set out in the negotiating brief. 
 
 
(d) 
In all cases, only public officers with no actual, potential or perceived conflict 
of interest shall lead or participate in negotiations.  All public officers involved 
in conducting negotiations must declare whether they have any actual, 
potential or perceived conflict of interest in accordance with SPR 186. 
 
 
 
 
(e) 
The procurement of consultancy services is not bound by the WTO GPA. 
Nonetheless, public officers authorised to conduct negotiations shall still 
observe the principles of fair play and transparency, and may make reference 
to the guidelines set out at Appendix III(J). 
 

Acceptance of offers 
 
460.   
If all items in the negotiating brief are satisfactorily resolved, procuring 
department should inform the Secretary of CCSB of the outcome and draw up a consultancy 
agreement, incorporating the terms agreed with the recommended firm, to be cleared with the 
D of J.  When the consultancy agreement is ready, the procuring department should notify the 
successful consulting firm and invite it to sign the contract on a specified date.  Unless 
otherwise authorised by the PS(Tsy), the public officer signing the contract on behalf of 
Government should be at directorate level.  The procedures set out in SPR 505-510 should be 
followed in the execution of a contract. 
 
REMUNERATION OF CONSULTANTS 
 
465.  (a) 
Remuneration for consultants may take the form of time charges, a lump sum 
payment by instalments, or a combination of both. 
 
 
 
  (i) 
Time charge payment - this method is suitable for assignments in which 
the duration and extent of the consultancy services cannot be 
determined in advance, e.g. investigations, economic appraisals and 
research.  Rates are agreed for professional, technical and supporting 
staff, with an element added for overheads and profit.  The consultant is 
also reimbursed for the use of special equipment and other expenditure 
which can be identified directly with the work.  When this method is 
used, detailed time records of all those engaged on the work must be 
maintained, payroll records must be open to inspection or audit by 
Government, and receipts and other documents must be provided to 
substantiate all reimbursable expenditure.  As an added safeguard, a 
ceiling is normally placed on the total amount to be paid to the 
consultant; and 
 
  (ii) 
Lump sum payment - this method is used when the scope and duration 
of the assignment can be defined clearly and fully.  The lump sum 
payment is generally computed by estimating the cost of those elements 
making up the time charges expected to be incurred. 
 
 
(b)  Before conducting negotiations on fees, where necessary, procuring 
departments should ask the consulting firm to provide a detailed cost 
breakdown of the consultancy.  During such negotiations, procuring 
departments should be guided by current market rates and staff costs incurred 
by Government on public officers performing comparable duties. 
 
 
(c) 
In general, the contract sums for consultancy agreements should be quoted and 
paid in Hong Kong dollars.  In order to avoid consulting firms putting in an 
unreasonable amount of allowance in their fee proposals to cover exchange 
risks for the contract period, procuring departments may allow consulting 
firms to quote in foreign currencies for services provided by personnel based 
outside Hong Kong and salaried in the quoted currencies.  Procuring 
departments should follow the procedures set out in SPR 355(b) if they intend 
to ask consulting firms to quote in foreign currencies other than US dollars for 
contracts likely to cost HK$10 million or more. 
 

 
(d) 
Procuring departments may, upon request by a third party such as the 
Legislative Council or the media, disclose the total amount of fees payable to 
the successful consulting firms.  Procuring departments should consult D of J 
for inclusion of a standard provision on the disclosure of fees payable to the 
consulting firm in the consultancy brief and the consultancy agreement.  For 
consultancies remunerated on a time charge basis, departments may make an 
estimate on the number of man-days required in order to work out the 
estimated total amount for disclosure purpose.  Procuring departments should 
not  disclose the individual rates of the consulting team engaged at various 
levels for the consultancies, as they may reveal the rates that the consulting 
firms pay to their staff.  Procuring departments should comply with the Code 
on Access to Information in handling requests for disclosure of such 
information.   
 
 
 
CANCELLATION OF A CONSULTANTS SELECTION EXERCISE 
 

470.  (a) 
If a procuring department decides to cancel a consultants selection exercise 
due to reasons such as public interest, lack of conforming bids, or conclusion 
of the exercise by entering into a service level agreement with a trading fund 
department, it shall seek the prior approval of the relevant consultants 
selection board and provide detailed justification for its decision.  For 
procurement of consultancy services with a value not exceeding the 
departmental limit specified in SPR 220(a), the authority for cancelling a 
consultants selection exercise has been delegated to DCSCs.  After obtaining 
the approval, the procuring department should promptly inform bidders of its 
decision. 
 
 
 
 
(b) 
Approval to cancel a consultants selection exercise is not required when no 
consultancy proposals are received after the close of invitation, or in the case 
of parallel tendering, if the relevant funding application is not approved by the 
Finance Committee of the Legislative Council. 
 
 

CHAPTER V 
 
CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION 
 
APPLICABILITY 
 
500.   
Unless otherwise specified, these Regulations apply to the administration of 
contracts for the procurement of stores and services and revenue contracts, irrespective of 
whether they were procured through the quotations, tender or consultants selection 
procedures. 
 
EXECUTION OF CONTRACTS 
 
Authorised contracting parties 
 
505.  (a) 
For procurement of stores, services and revenue contracts under the tender or 
consultants selection procedures, departments shall conclude contracts with the 
selected suppliers, service providers or consultants either by issuing a letter to 
accept their offers or by formally signing contracts with them, as appropriate. 
Before the said letter is issued or a contract is signed, the procuring department 
should obtain a certified true copy of the business registration certificate 
concerned from the Commissioner of Inland Revenue or documentary 
evidence showing that the tenderer is exempted from business registration 
under the BRO.  In the case of a limited company, the procuring department 
should ask the company to produce a certified true copy of the memorandum 
and articles of association and a board resolution to prove due authorisation of 
the signatory for the signing of the contract.  In case of a partnership, the 
procuring department should ask the firm to confirm in writing the authority of 
the relevant partner for entering into the contract and dealing with matters 
incidental thereto.  In case of non-Hong Kong suppliers, service providers or 
consultants, procuring departments should consult D of J on measures to be 
taken to ensure due execution. 
 
 
(b) 
Where the firm to be awarded the contract is on a list of registered or approved 
suppliers, service providers or consulting firms maintained by procuring 
departments, the procuring department may already have records indicating 
the business registration certificate number, the date of expiry of the certificate 
and/or other relevant information of the firms (e.g. exemption from business 
registration under the BRO).  In such cases and where business registration 
certificate is not exempted, verification will only be necessary annually when 
the business registration certificate is due for renewal. 
 
 
(c) 
In case of doubt as to whether the company is prohibited by its Memorandum 
or Articles of Association to carry on certain business or to exercise certain 
powers or whether a person has the authority to sign a contract on behalf of the 
company, the procuring department should seek D of J’s advice at the earliest 
opportunity.  Most contracts are in a standard form, and their general method 
of execution will be apparent from the form.  Any queries or points of doubt 
about execution of contracts should be addressed to the D of J but some 
guidance notes are provided at Appendix V(A). 
 

 
(d)  Departments shall report any cases of companies, partnerships or 
unincorporated bodies apparently doing business without complying with the 
requirements of the Companies Ordinance (Cap. 622) or the Business 
Registration Ordinance (Cap. 310) to the Registrar of Companies or the 
Commissioner of Inland Revenue, as the case may be. 
 
 
(e) 
Save for SPR 505(f) below, contracts shall be concluded by public officers at 
the directorate level signing the relevant documents on behalf of the 
Government unless the PS(Tsy) has authorised otherwise.  For the avoidance 
of doubt, if the substance of that document is to conclude a contract either 
immediately or subject to condition(s), it shall be so signed by a directorate 
officer. 
 
 
(f) 
For procurement under quotation procedures specified in Chapter II of the 
SPRs, contracts may be concluded by public officers designated by COs 
signing the relevant documents on behalf of the Government.  The designated 
officer(s) shall not be lower than the rank of Assistant Supplies Officer/ 
Executive Officer II or equivalent. 
 
Insurance and personal injury 
 
510.  (a) 
Where it is required by the terms of the contract, procuring departments shall 
ensure that the firm has a valid policy or policies of insurance prior to 
executing the contract and ask the firm to submit the policy or policies 
required by the contract together with premium receipts.  The public officer in 
charge of the contract shall examine the validity of such a policy or policies in 
administering the contract and be responsible for the safe-keeping of the policy 
or policies. 
 
 
(b) 
When an accident takes place resulting in personal injury, section 15 of the 
Employees’ Compensation Ordinance (Cap. 282) obliges the firm as employer 
to notify the Commissioner for Labour in the prescribed form.  If not already 
specified in the terms of the contract, the public officer in charge of the 
contract shall instruct the firm to send a copy of such notice to the department 
responsible for the contract.  Should any claim be made by the injured person 
or his representative directly against the Government under the Employees’ 
Compensation Ordinance or at common law or under the Fatal Accident 
Ordinance (Cap. 22), the department responsible for the contract shall 
immediately notify the firm, the Commissioner for Labour and the D of J. 
 

CONTRACT PAYMENTS 
 
515.  (a) 
All payments properly due to a firm must be made in accordance with the 
terms of the contract and should normally be effected within 30 calendar days 
upon acceptance of the deliverables.  Should circumstances arise where a 
payment has to be made before all the necessary authorities have been 
obtained, the department concerned must seek prior approval from the 
Treasury Branch of FSTB for the opening of an advance account to facilitate 
the payment.  Opening of advance accounts should only be considered in 
exceptional circumstances, e.g. an unexpectedly high arbitration award.  An 
advance account is opened on the personal responsibility of the CO and must 
be cleared as soon as the necessary authorities have been obtained. 
 
 
(b) 
Payments for contracts quoted in a foreign currency are normally paid in that 
foreign currency.  If it is agreed by both contracting parties that payments are 
to be made in Hong Kong dollars instead of the quoted currency, the date and 
conversion rate for each payment shall be clearly specified in the contract. 
 
 
(c) 
For contracts with a total foreign currency (other than US dollar) commitment 
less than the equivalent to HK$10 million, the department concerned shall 
report to the Hong Kong Monetary Authority at the end of each month all 
known or anticipated foreign currency requirements in the format as specified 
by the Hong Kong Monetary Authority. 
 
 
(d) 
For contracts with a total foreign currency (other than US dollar) commitment 
equivalent to HK$10 million or more, the department concerned shall ask the 
Treasury to arrange forward purchase through the Hong Kong Monetary 
Authority before the contract is awarded.  The transaction of forward 
purchases will normally take place on the day the contract is awarded, unless 
otherwise advised by the Hong Kong Monetary Authority.  The requisition 
memorandum to the Treasury and the Hong Kong Monetary Authority shall 
quote the authority for contract award and provide a schedule of payment dates 
and amounts of foreign currency required. 
 
VARIATIONS TO CONTRACTS 
 
520.  (a) 
Under no circumstances may a department vary a contract which will result in 
the approved commitment or approved project estimate being exceeded. 
 

 
(b) 
A CO, or a designated officer of appropriate rank, may approve any number of 
variations to a contract (including extension of the contract period for a 
contract awarded by his department and minor variations to the GLD 
contracts, i.e. contracts awarded by the GLD), which are inevitable and do not 
increase the original contract value
 (or do not affect the original contract 
value in the case of a revenue contract), provided that all relevant factors, 
including rates, are no less favourable. Contingencies (such as notional value 
for additional services in the case of consultancy agreements for architectural 
or engineering services) or optional items contemplated in and falling within 
the terms of the contract shall not be counted as part of the original value of a 
contract.  For works contracts, departments should follow the guidelines issued 
by DEVB from time to time in defining the optional items for the purpose of 
this provision. 
 
 (c) 
The cumulative value of contract variations for all contracts should not 
normally exceed 50% of the original contract value
.  Contingencies or 
optional items referred to in SPR 520(b) shall not be counted as part of the 
original contract value.  Excesses have to be approved with fully documented 
justifications.  Such contract variations should be avoided as far as possible 
and should normally be used as a stop-gap measure, unless they are otherwise 
justified in accordance with the GLD Circular issued from time to time.  Any 
variation to a contract which will increase the original value of the contract (or 
affect the original value of the contract in the case of a revenue contract), or 
any increase in contract sums must be approved by the appropriate authority 
in Appendix V(B)
. 
 
 
(d) 
COs shall ensure that public officers responsible for matters concerning 
contract variations interpret the limits specified at Appendix V(B) strictly and 
that they do not evade the limits by including items which have the effect of 
bringing down the original increase in the contract value had those items not 
been included.  For the avoidance of doubt, for a contract that involves 
variations leading to a decrease in contract value in one area and an increase in 
contract value in another during the contract period, only the variation that 
leads to an increase in contract value will count under the accumulated value 
of the contract for determining the appropriate level of authority for seeking 
approval for contract variation as specified in Appendix V(B).  For variations 
which inevitably involve the replacement of original contract items with new 
items which are collectively part and parcel of the subject variation, only the 
net value of the variation will count. 
 
 
(e) 
Contract variations, especially those which are not provided for in the original 
contract, may amount to new procurements.  For contract variations amounting 
to new procurements covered by WTO GPA, procuring departments shall 
ensure that all relevant requirements of WTO GPA are complied with.  In case 
of doubt as to whether contract variations amount to new procurements 
covered by WTO GPA, procuring departments should seek legal advice from 
the D of J or, in the case of works contracts, LAD(W)/DEVB.   
 
 
(f) 
Departments should copy correspondence on approved contract variations and 
any supplementary agreements consequentially signed to the D of A. 
 

CONTRACT NEGOTIATIONS 
 
525.   
If a department proposes to vary the terms of a contract, it shall seek agreement 
of the relevant authority (as specified in SPR 520 and Appendix V(B)) on the proposed 
variation and seek its prior agreement to the strategy or bottom line for the contract 
negotiation.  For GLD contracts, the PS(Tsy) has delegated to the DGL the authority to 
approve contract negotiation.  Departments shall conduct contract negotiations in accordance 
with the principles set out in SPR 385 and Appendix III(J). 
 
DISPOSAL OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 
 
530.  (a) 
Departments shall retain the original copy of an executed contract, and the 
related original security bond, bank guarantee and insurance policy, if any.  A 
certified true copy of the executed contract shall be forwarded to the D of A 
for audit purpose. 
 
 
(b) 
Departments shall not keep the original documents in files required for 
working purposes or with working copies.  The documents must be stored in a 
safe or strongroom if available; otherwise they shall be kept in a locked 
cabinet or cupboard.  The public officer responsible for the safe custody of the 
documents shall keep the cabinet or cupboard key. 
 
 
(c) 
Departments may destroy documents submitted by unsuccessful firms in a 
tender or consultants selection exercise three months after the date the relevant 
contract has been executed. 
 
 
(d) 
For procurements covered by WTO GPA, departments shall maintain the 
tender documents, all documents submitted by the tenderers, any other 
documents and reports of tendering procedures and contract awards, including 
the records required under SPR 390(c), and data that ensure the appropriate 
traceability of the conduct of procurements by electronic means for a period of 
not less than three years from the date of contract award. 
 
 
MONITORING OF PERFORMANCE OF CONTRACTORS AND CONSULTANTS 
 
535.   
Departments shall devise an effective monitoring mechanism to ensure that a 
contractor or consultant performs to standard and complies with the terms of a contract. 
Specifically for contracts with a value exceeding the quotation limits specified in SPR 220, 
departments shall follow SPR 536-541 below.  
 
536.   
Departments shall evaluate the performance of their contractors or 
consultants — 
 
 
(a) 
at least once every six months until completion of the contract for contracts 
lasting more than one year; and 
 
 
(b) 
upon completion of the contract for contracts lasting a year or less. 
 
537.   
As soon as it becomes apparent that the performance of a contractor or 
consultant is not satisfactory or deteriorating, the concerned department must — 
 

 
(a) 
notify the contractor or consultant in writing; 
 
 
(b) 
invite him to explain the reasons for the unsatisfactory performance; 
 
 
(c) 
request him to make improvements; and 
 
 
(d) 
step up monitoring. 
 
538.   
If despite the action taken in accordance with SPR 537, the contractor or 
consultant fails to make any improvement in performance and the department is not satisfied 
with the reasons (if any) given by the contractor or consultant for his unsatisfactory 
performance, the department should consider taking further action in accordance with the 
terms of the contract or consultancy agreement.  For example, the department should warn the 
contractor or consultant in writing that further unsatisfactory performance of the contractor or 
consultant may result in the termination of the contract and/or suspension of the contractor or 
consultant from bidding Government’s new contracts.  The department may also suspend 
payment to the contractor or consultant in the event that pre-agreed contractual milestones are 
not achieved. 
 
539.   
Departments shall keep these performance records on contractors or 
consultants for as long as they consider necessary but in any case, not less than three years 
upon completion of the contracts. 
 
540.   
For the purpose of monitoring the performance of works contractors, 
departments shall follow the guidelines and procedures set out in the Contractor Management 
Handbook and the relevant DEVB TC(W).  For the purpose of monitoring the performance of 
consultants appointed by CCSB, AACSB and EACSB, departments shall follow the 
guidelines and procedures set out in Appendix V(C) of SPR, Handbook on Selection, 
Appointment and Administration of Architectural and Associated Consultants or Handbook 
on Selection, Appointment and Administration of Engineering and Associated Consultants, 
and DEVB TC(W), where appropriate.  For the purpose of monitoring the performance of 
consultants appointed by the DCSCs, departments may draw up their own procedures or 
follow the arrangements of the relevant consultants selection board. 
 
541.   
Departments shall take into account the relevant past performance records of a 
contractor or consultant where available in evaluating his tender or consultancy proposal. 
 

CHAPTER VI 
 
STORES RECORDS 
 
GENERAL 
 
600.   
Except where otherwise approved by the DGL, departments should record all 
stores items in ledgers, vouchers and registers specified in these Regulations for stock control. 
Public officers who certify on the above stores forms are personally responsible for the 
accuracy of the certification. 
 
605.   
Departments which seek to introduce computerised stock records or stores 
vouchers should consult and agree with the Government Chief Information Officer, DGL, 
DAS and D of A the scope and details of the software package to ensure completeness of data 
and compliance with prevailing Government Regulations and instructions. 
 
LEDGERS 
 
610.   
Departments should keep complete records of the receipt and issue of all stores 
held in a departmental store unit, including livestock, in manual or preferably computerised 
stores ledgers. 
 
615.   
Stores ledgers should be posted by a public officer other than the one in direct 
control of the stores. 
 
620.   
Departments should observe the following in the use of ledgers — 
 
 
(a) 
Account for new (unused), serviceable (used) and unserviceable stores in 
separate ledgers. 
 
 
(b) 
Allocate a unique folio reference number to each type of stores item in stock 
and strictly control the creation of new stores items by means of control index 
in the ledger. 
 
 
(c) 
Post all ledgers promptly, and support each entry by a voucher, the nature and 
number of which should be recorded against the entry. 
 
 
(d) 
Show the unit of issue, e.g. number, kilogram, metre, etc. in the ledger and 
record items taken on charge in that unit. 
 
 
(e) 
Avoid making erasures in the stores ledgers.  The public officer responsible for 
keeping the ledger should mark all corrections clearly in red ink and initial 
them in case of manual stores ledgers; and support all amendments by 
vouchers and a brief explanatory note on each supporting voucher in case of 
computerised stores ledgers. 
 

 
(f) 
For the use of manual stores ledgers, remove completed ledger sheets from a 
loose-leaf ledger in current use only after the transactions on the sheets have 
been checked and the balances carried forward to the new sheets have been 
verified by the D of A.  File these completed ledger sheets in numerical order 
in a separate binder and update the control index accordingly.  Where 
computerised stores ledgers are used, maintain back up copies of the ledgers. 
 
625.   
Departments should notify the DGL, DAS and D of A of any loss of, or 
damage to ledgers and investigate the matter immediately. 
 
630.   
In the event of any loss or damage to ledgers, the CO concerned should appoint 
a board of survey to carry out a full stock-taking exercise immediately.  After the Board’s 
findings have been endorsed by the CO, the DSM appointed under SPR 135 shall open a new 
ledger to account for the stores which were recorded in the lost or damaged ledgers subject to 
the value of the stores not exceeding $250,000.  If the value of the stores exceeds $250,000, 
the department should obtain the prior approval of the DGL. 
 
635.   
Subject to the approval of  D of A, the DSM may destroy completed manual or 
computerised stores ledger sheets seven years after the end of the financial year containing the 
last entry without reference to DGL and DAS.  He should sign the relevant destruction 
certificate and retain it for audit inspection. 
 
VOUCHERS AND FORMS 
 
650.   
DGL is the authority for introducing new stores vouchers and forms and for 
revising existing stores vouchers and forms.  Departments may, in consultation with DGL, 
revise existing stores vouchers and forms or develop new stores vouchers and forms to cater 
for their operational requirements in accounting for and management of stores. 
 
660.   
Departments should observe the following in the use of vouchers — 
 
 
(a) 
File completed vouchers, which contain full particulars of authorities, dates, 
numbers, quantities and rates, in numerical order. 
 
 
(b) 
Quote the relevant reference numbers such as ledger folio reference number or 
inventory sheet reference on the receipt copy of the voucher in case the stores 
ordered are required to be taken on charge. 
 
 
(c) 
Avoid making erasures on the vouchers.  Mark corrections by striking out the 
erroneous figures or words and entering amendments above.  The public 
officer who is authorised to sign such vouchers should initial the amendment. 
 
 
(d) 
If a voucher is cancelled, file all copies, except the last one which should 
remain in the pad, with the completed vouchers in correct numerical sequence. 
Mark clearly all cancelled vouchers “Cancelled” and have them initialled by 
the public officer who is authorised to sign such vouchers. 
 
665.   
Departments should notify the DGL, D of A and DAS of any loss of, or 
damage to used or unused stores vouchers and controlled numbered stores forms. 
 

670.   
DSM may destroy general forms, non-control-numbered stores forms, books of 
unused stores vouchers/control-numbered stores forms which are either obsolete or in excess 
of requirements.  In the latter case, the CO who issues the forms or vouchers must authorise 
their destruction.  After destruction, the DSM should sign the destruction certificate and file it 
for D of A’s examination. 
 
675.   
DSM may destroy, in the same manner as that described in SPR 670 above, 
used or partly used books of stores vouchers/control-numbered stores forms after they have 
been retained for three years and audited by the D of A.  If a book contains original copies of 
used vouchers or forms, departments must seek approval from the DAS for the destruction 
unless the book has been retained for seven years after the end of the financial year containing 
the last entry. 
 
REGISTERS 
 
680.   
Departments should maintain registers of various stores records in accordance 
with the guidelines set out at Appendix VI.  

CHAPTER VII 
 
ACCOUNTING FOR STORES 
 
CLASSIFICATION OF STORES 
 
700.   
There are two types of stores :  GLD unallocated stores and departmental 
stores. 
 
GLD unallocated stores 
 
705.  (a) 
GLD unallocated stores are stores purchased by the DGL in bulk and held in 
stock pending subsequent sale or issue to departments and other bodies. 
 
 
(b) 
The costs of these stores are chargeable in the first instance to the Unallocated 
Stores Suspense Account established under section 30 of the Public Finance 
Ordinance and administered by the DGL.  When these stores are issued to 
departments, DGL informs the DAS to debit the appropriate subheads of 
expenditure of the departments concerned and to credit the Unallocated Stores 
Suspense Account correspondingly. 
 
Departmental stores 
 
710.  (a) 
Departmental stores are stores acquired by departments solely for their own 
use.  They may be standard stores from the GLD unallocated stores or other 
items acquired by departments through direct purchase or other means. 
 
 
 
 
(b) 
Departmental stores are further classified into inventory and non-inventory 
items.  Inventory items are generally stores of permanent or non-consumable 
nature and with a unit cost at or above $1,000 at the time of purchase, while all 
the other stores are non-inventory items. 
 
ACCOUNTING FOR GENERAL INVENTORY ITEMS 
 
715.   
DSM is responsible for proper accounting of inventory stores received and 
issued.  He should — 
 
 
(a) 
ensure that the public officer maintaining the inventories in a store unit records 
all the issues and receipts correctly and makes cross-references of the entries 
in the relevant inventory records such as Inventory Stores Ledger Sheet 
(GF 270) and Inventory Sheet and Distribution Record (GF 272) with the 
relevant vouchers such as the Departmental Order for Supply of Stores 
(GF 219) or Departmental Combined Requisition and Issue Voucher (GF 277); 
 
 
(b) 
arrange to check inventories at least once a year and ensure that any 
discrepancies are dealt with in accordance with SPR 1030; and 
 
 
(c) 
maintain a control index to record the number of inventory sheets in use. 
 
720.   
DSM should account for inventory items as follows — 
 

 (a) 
Items received as stock in the first instance 
 
 
 
(i) 
Enter the items in GF 270 when they are received into the departmental 
stores. 
 
 
 
(ii)  Strike the items off the GF 270 when they are issued from stock and 
enter them in bulk on GF 272 of an entity (which can be a branch, 
section or unit of a department, or a floor or wing of an office block). 
 
 
 
(iii)  In the case of departmental quarters or in exceptional circumstances 
where departments consider there are operational needs, enter also the 
items on the reverse side of the GF 272 and on the Room Inventory 
Record (GF 273).  DSM and the inventory holder should each hold a 
copy of the GF 273. 
 
 (b) 
Items brought into immediate use 
 
 
 
Account for the items as in (a)(ii)-(iii) above, but without first taking them on 
charge on a GF 270 and then striking them off. 
 
 (c) 
Items on loan from individuals or non-government organisations 
 
 
 
Account for the items as in (a) or (b) above for the period on loan. 
 
 (d) 
Items donated by individuals or non-government organisations 
 
 
 
Bring the items on charge using a Departmental Stores Return Note (GF 278) 
as soon as acceptance of the donation has been approved and account for the 
items as in (a) or (b) above as appropriate.  
 
730.   
Departments may transfer items from one GF 272 to another.  The public 
officer requiring the items should raise a Departmental Combined Requisition and Issue 
Voucher (GF 277) and route this through the DSM for his approval.  Once the transfer is 
completed, the public officer concerned should duly inform the DSM so that the latter can 
update the records accordingly.  In cases where GF 273 is maintained, departments may 
transfer items from one GF 273 to another without the use of vouchers provided that both 
records are under the same GF 272 and all relevant records are updated with the inventory 
holder receiving the items signed to that effect. 
 
ACCOUNTING FOR SPECIAL INVENTORY ITEMS 
 
735.   
Departments should account for special inventory items including fire fighting 
equipment, electrical and gas appliances, books, uniforms and accoutrements in accordance 
with the procedures set out in SPR 740-760 below. 
 

Fire fighting equipment 
 
740.   
User departments are responsible for the procurement of all portable 
fire-fighting equipment in their buildings and should account for the equipment on GF 272. 
The installation, testing, maintenance, inspection and repair of the equipment should be 
arranged by user departments or their appointed agents.  In the event of loss or damage of the 
equipment, user departments should initiate write-off action in accordance with 
SPR 1035-1040 as appropriate. 
 
Electrical and gas appliances 
 
745.  (a) 
For accounting purposes, electrical and gas appliances are classified into 
non-specialist, i.e. those which are listed in the Inventory Distribution Sheet of 
Electrical and Gas Appliances (GF 269), and specialist, i.e. those which are 
not listed in GF 269. 
 
 
(b) 
Departments should account for the appliances as follows — 
 
 
 
(i)  Non-specialist electrical and gas appliances for office 
accommodation—follow SPR 720, but use GF 269 instead of GF 272. 
 
 
 
(ii) 
Non-specialist electrical and gas appliances for departmental quarters—
use GF 273 with the disposition summarised on GF 269. 
 
 
 
(iii)  Specialist electrical and gas appliances—follow SPR 720. 
 
 
(c) 
The Director of Electrical and Mechanical Services should account for the 
non-specialist electrical and gas appliances provided to each non-departmental 
quarter on the Inventory of Electrical and Gas Appliances (EMSD 32), and 
summarise the disposition of the appliances on GF 269. 
 
Books 
 
750.  (a) 
For the purpose of these Regulations, books are classified into books typified 
as non-inventory stores, books held on departmental charge and books 
maintained in departmental libraries. 
 
 
(b) 
Each library should maintain an Accession Register (GF 39).  Each line in the 
Register should be assigned a number in strict numerical sequence, called the 
accession number, for allocation to each book when it is received. 
 
 
(c) 
Apart from those classified as non-inventory items, which need not be taken 
on charge, departments should account for books as follows — 
 
 
 
(i) 
Books held on departmental charge—in accordance with SPR 720. 
 
 
 
(ii) 
Books maintained in departmental libraries—allot to each book the next 
accession number immediately upon receipt and enter the number onto 
GF 39.  Record the accession number outside on the binding panel of 
the book.  Where not practicable, record the number on the inside front 
cover. 
 

 
(d) 
Departments should maintain a Loan Register to record books issued on loan. 
 
Uniforms 
 
755.  (a) 
The authorities for the supply and design of uniforms are laid down in 
CSR 570-572.  Departments should follow the Uniform Scale approved by the 
relevant authorities under the provisions of CSR 570-571 for the issue and 
replacement of uniform items.  COs may personally grant exemption for 
certain uniform items from returning upon replacement or by outgoing officers 
having regard to the value of the items concerned and the security concern. 
The exempted items should usually be of low value and may create hygiene 
problems in case they are returned to departments for central disposal. 
Examples are socks, stockings and pantyhose.  Uniform items bearing insignia, 
badges, departmental logo, department’s name/acronym should not be 
exempted from returning. 
 
 
(b) 
Departments should maintain either a Uniform Record Card (GF 203) or an 
approved departmental uniform record card/sheet for each public officer and 
ensure its accuracy.  All record cards/sheets should be serially numbered and 
supported by a control index. 
 
 
(c) 
Except where otherwise authorised by the DGL, departments should follow the 
following procedures in (d)-(g) below for the issue of uniforms. 
 
 
(d) 
Except for direct counter issues as described in (g) below, the public officer in 
charge of the requisitioning unit should submit to the DSM lists of public 
officers for whom issues are required, together with either — 
 
 
 
(i) 
a GF 277 for initial issue; or 
 
 
 
(ii)  an Exchange Voucher for Stores on Inventory Charge (GF 275) for 
replacement issue, together with the items to be replaced (except for the 
exempted items). 
 
 
(e) 
In case of an initial issue, the DSM should issue the items required, account 
for the issue in GF 270 by means of GF 277/GF 275 and update the GF 203 of 
the public officers concerned accordingly.  In case of a replacement issue, the 
DSM should examine the items returned (except for the exempted items) and 
satisfy himself that they are unserviceable before issuing replacement items. 
 
 
(f) 
Upon receipt of the uniform items, the officer-in-charge of the requisitioning 
unit should distribute them according to the name lists attached to the GF 277 
or GF 275 and request the public officers concerned to acknowledge receipt by 
signing against their names on the lists.  He should retain the lists for audit 
purpose. 
 

 
(g) 
In case of counter issues, unless the requisitioning officer can produce a 
GF 277 or GF 275 in which case the procedure in (e) should be followed, the 
DSM should record the issue on a Counter Record of Issues/Returns of 
Uniforms (GF 292) and the public officer’s GF 203 and request the public 
officer to sign on both records to acknowledge receipt.  When a GF 292 is 
completely filled up, he should raise a GF 277 to account for all the issued 
items on the GF 292 and then strike the items off the GF 270 accordingly. 
 
760.  (a) 
DSM should withdraw unserviceable items (except for the exempted items) 
and bring them on charge in the Unserviceable Ledger (see SPR 620(a)) for 
subsequent condemnation in accordance with the procedures laid down in 
Chapter XI. 
 
 
(b) 
DSM should take on charge used but serviceable uniforms returned from 
outgoing officers as serviceable (used) stores in accordance with SPR 620(a). 
He may subsequently issue such items to a public officer in excess of the 
latter’s normal uniform scale as a supplementary issue and record this on the 
public officer’s uniform record card.  When the public officer no longer 
requires the supplementary issues, he should return the items and the DSM 
should then update the public officer’s GF 203 accordingly. 
 
ACCOUNTING FOR NON-INVENTORY ITEMS 
 
765.   
Departments should account for non-inventory items as follows — 
 
 
(a) 
Items held in stock in a departmental store unit—in a Non-inventory Stores 
Ledger (GF 291).  Except those cases set out in SPR 775 below, no further 
accounting for the stores is necessary once their issue has been recorded in the 
Ledger. 
 
 
(b) 
Items issued for immediate use, for use on Working Stores Tables or specific 
jobs—state the purpose of the issue in the relevant voucher such as the 
Unallocated Stores Requisition and Delivery Note (GF 210) or GF 219, e.g. 
put down the relevant job number or cross-reference it with a GF 277. 
 
770.   
To facilitate control and to simplify the accounting procedure, the DSM 
should, where necessary, prepare Working Stores Tables for controlling the issue of stores 
which are regularly required in fairly large quantities by individual units.  The Table should 
specify the approved maximum permissible stock level for the unit concerned. 
 
775.   
If departments consider that certain non-inventory items should be accounted 
for as inventory items for control purposes, they should account for the items in accordance 
with SPR 715-760.  Once so accounted, departments should continue to treat them as 
inventory items unless otherwise agreed by the DGL. 
 

CHAPTER VIII 
 
MANAGEMENT OF STORES 
 
GENERAL 
 
800.  (a) 
COs are responsible for the general supervision and control of stores.  In order 
to make the best use of government stores, departments should follow good 
stores management practices in their daily operation.   
 
 
(b) 
DSM is responsible for the proper use of Government mark when procuring 
stores. Departments should deface the Government mark when selling such 
stores for private use. 
 
805.  (a) 
Departments should consult the Director of Fire Services on the storage of 
highly inflammable or explosive items where the quantities exceed the 
exemption levels stipulated under the Dangerous Goods Ordinance, and on the 
adequacy of fire-fighting facilities, where necessary. 
 
 
(b) 
Departments should make special arrangements for the storage of corrosive, 
radioactive or other dangerous materials in consultation with the Government 
Chemist or the Senior Physicist in-charge, Radiation Health Unit of the 
Department of Health. 
 
810.   
In compiling draft Schedules of Accommodation for office fitting-out purpose, 
departments should — 
 
 
(a) 
give due consideration to the provision of proper and adequate storage 
facilities and the subsequent safety and safe-keeping of all stores including 
dangerous and perishable stores, and valuable, attractive or delicate items of 
equipment; and 
 
 
(b) 
include in the Schedules a full specification of the storage facilities covering 
layout, fixtures, fitments and special conditions, if any, and where appropriate, 
consult the relevant authorities. 
 
RECEIPT OF STORES 
 
815.   
The DSM is responsible for ensuring that stores supplied by a supplier are in 
full compliance with the contract or order specifications.  The public officer who receives the 
stores should report immediately to the DSM any incidents of sub-standard stores received. 
 
820.   
A public officer authorised to sign an order voucher should ensure that the 
stores ordered are delivered to the correct location within the stipulated time.  This public 
officer should sign for any subsequent alteration or amendment to the order or cancellation of 
delivery and agree this in writing with the supplier. 
 
825.   
Upon receipt of stores, departments should — 
 

 
(a) 
inspect the stores received within a reasonable period of time.  If stores 
received are subject to extensive testing procedures, payment may only be 
made upon satisfactory completion of the acceptance testing; except where the 
contract specifies otherwise; and 
 
 
(b) 
account immediately for the accepted stores and give due consideration to any 
discount for prompt payment offered by the supplier.  Payment should be made 
in accordance with the relevant provisions in the Financial and Accounting 
Regulations. 
 
830.   
Departments should account for the proper handling/disposal of any 
containers/pallets, etc. received from suppliers but having resaleable value — 
 
 
(a) 
Take on charge empty non-returnable drums of a capacity of 200 litres or more 
in the Inventory Stores Ledger Sheet (GF 270) and record their subsequent 
disposal. 
 
 
(b) 
Maintain a record on the receipt and return of all containers returnable to or on 
loan from suppliers. 
 
835.   
Departments which reject stores from local suppliers should do so in writing, 
with a copy to the DGL for an order placed or a contract let by the GLD. 
 
ISSUE OF GLD UNALLOCATED STORES 
 
845.  (a) 
DGL may issue unallocated stores to departments for use in government 
services. 
 
 
(b) 
DGL may issue on payment basis to non-government organisations or 
individuals, unallocated stores which he considers are surplus to government 
requirements in accordance with the following procedures — 
 
 
 
(i) 
charges the stores at stock price plus an additional overhead charge of 
20%, which may be waived only with the authority of the PS(Tsy); or 
 
 
 
(ii) 
where there is a significant increase in market price over the stock price, 
consults the PS(Tsy) on whether the issue price should be calculated as 
stated in (i) above, or in some other way. 
 
ISSUE OF DEPARTMENTAL STORES 
 
850.   
Departments should follow the procedures set out at Appendix VI when 
issuing departmental stores for government works or services, for transfer between depots, for 
conversion into different specifications or units, or for sale. 
 
Issue of stores on loan 
 
855.  (a) 
Subject to the approval of the DSM and to the loan period not exceeding six 
months, departments may issue departmental stores on loan in accordance with 
the following procedures — 
 

 
 
(i) 
To public officers within a department—record the issue in a Loan 
Register and retrieve the items immediately after the specified period of 
loan or before the public officers leave the department (e.g. on transfer 
or retirement). 
 
 
 
(ii)  To other departments—similar to (i) above.  In addition, the issuing 
department should require the borrowing department to raise a GF 277 
and a Departmental Stores Return Note (GF 278) to cover the issue and 
return of the stores respectively.  Throughout the loan period, the stores 
remain on charge with the issuing department. 
 
 
 
(iii)  Contractors engaged in government works—similar to (ii) above except 
that the issuing department raises GF 277 and GF 278 on behalf of the 
contractor.  In addition, the contractor has to provide a written 
agreement, including appropriate financial arrangements to safeguard 
Government’s interests. 
 
 
(b) 
Where authorised personally by the CO or his deputy, departments may also 
issue stores on loan to private individuals or non-government organisations by 
following the procedures stated in (iii) above.  The issuing department will 
raise GF 277 and GF 278 on behalf of the borrower. 
 
Issue of tools on loan to government employees 
 
860.  (a) 
Departments should follow the procedures below for the issue of departmental 
tools on loan to government employees — 
 
 
 
(i) 
Long-term loan in respect of items required by the employees for 
carrying out their normal daily work — 
 
 
 
 
— 
Make issues in accordance with a standard scale where possible. 
 
 
 
 
— 
Record the issues on an Inventory Sheet and Distribution Record 
(GF 272) or a register/card (one sheet/page for each employee) 
designed to suit departmental requirements. 
 
 
 
 
— 
Check all tools issued physically against the records at least once 
every six months. 
 
 
 
(ii)  Short-term loan in respect of items required by the employees for a 
specific job outside the course of their normal daily work — 
 
 
 
 
— 
Record the issues in a Loan Register. 
 
 
 
 
— 
Retrieve the tools immediately to the departmental store unit 
once the job is completed. 
 
 
(b) 
Government employees are required to return all departmental tools on loan to 
them before taking leave of seven or more consecutive days. 
 

Issue of stores to other departments 
 
865.  (a) 
Subject to the following authorities, a department may issue departmental 
stores which are no longer required to another department — 
 
 
 
Original value of stores 
 
 
issued in any one case 
Authority  
 
 
 
Not exceeding $50,000 
 
CO 
 
 
 
More than $50,000 but not exceeding 
 DGL 
$250,000 
 
  Over 
$250,000 
 
PS(Tsy) 
 
 
(b) 
The issuing department should require the receiving department to raise a 
GF 277 for the issue.  The GF 277 should bear the reference of the approving 
authority. 
 
Issue of stores on payment 
 
870.   
Subject to the approval of the DGL, departments may issue departmental 
stores, which are considered surplus to the department's requirements, on payment basis to 
non-government organisations, or individuals as follows — 
 
 
(a) 
charge the stores at stock price plus an additional overhead charge of 20%, 
which may be waived only with the authority of the PS(Tsy); or 
 
 
(b) 
where there is a significant increase in the market price over the stock price, 
consult the PS(Tsy) on whether the issue price should be calculated as stated in 
(a) above, or in some other way. 
 
 
 
RETURN OF STORES 
 
Stores issued from GLD unallocated stock 
 
875.  (a) 
Serviceable departmental stores received from GLD Unallocated Stock which 
are no longer required may be listed on a GLD Unallocated Serviceable Stores 
Return Note (GF 224) and return to the GLD for acceptance into GLD 
Unallocated Stock provided that they are — 
 
 
 
 
(i) 
not obsolete or surplus to government requirements; 
 
 
 
(ii)  in a condition acceptable to the DGL and suitable for re-issue to other 
departments; and 
 
 
 
(iii)  in complete units of quantity. 
 
 
(b) 
The DGL will take the returned stores on charge in the GLD unallocated stores 
account at the current stock price.  After receiving the notification from the 
DGL, the DAS will debit the Unallocated Stores Suspense Account and — 
 

 
 
(i) 
credit the returning department’s vote if they are returned in the same 
financial year in which they were issued; or 
 
 
 
(ii) 
credit the General Revenue if they are returned in a year subsequent to 
the financial year in which they were issued. 
 
Stores issued from departmental stock 
 
880.   
If serviceable stores received from departmental stock are no longer required, 
the public officers concerned should return them to departmental stock.  They should indicate 
on the GF 278 whether the stores are new (unused) or serviceable (used). 
 
SAFE CUSTODY OF STORES 
 
885.   
Public officers are personally responsible for the safe custody of all stores 
received by them in the course of their duties.  They may be surcharged for any loss resulting 
from a failure to follow these Regulations, and/or any instructions issued by the DGL 
regarding the safe custody of stores. 
 
HANDOVER OF STORES 
 
890.  (a) 
When stores on ledger charge are handed over, both the outgoing and 
incoming officers should verify that all items shown in the stores ledgers are 
actually held in stock and that all items in stock are correctly recorded in the 
ledgers.  However, if the DSM considers that, owing to a large number of 
items, it is not practicable for the incoming officer to check all of them, he 
may permit the incoming officer to select a number of items, which should 
include valuable and highly attractive items, for verification. 
 
 
(b) 
The outgoing officer should record all surpluses and deficiencies noted during 
verification on a Departmental Stocktaking—Schedule of Discrepancies 
(GF 241) and report them to the CO through the DSM by completing 
paragraph 1 of the Departmental Stocktaking Report (GF 237).  He should also 
immediately raise a GF 277 and/or GF 278 as necessary to deal with the 
discrepancies in accordance with SPR 1030-1070. 
 
 
(c) 
On completion of the verification, both the outgoing and incoming officers 
should sign on the Handing Over Certificate (GF 239) and forward it to the CO 
through the DSM. 
 
895.  (a) 
If the outgoing officer is unable to hand over stores issued to him personally, 
the CO should appoint a Handing Over Board which should proceed in 
accordance with SPR 1015 (a)-(c)(i).  A completed Certificate of Handing 
Over by a Board (GF 240) should be forwarded to CO through DSM. 
 
 
(b) 
The outgoing officer may be held responsible for any deficiencies reported; 
whilst the incoming officer may be held responsible for any deficiencies not 
reported but subsequently discovered. 
 
 
 
 

SECURITY OF STORES 
 
 
896.   
DSM is responsible for assisting the CO in general supervision and control of 
stores and stores accounts within his purview.  In this respect, DSM should – 
 
 
(a) 
inspect each store unit under his direct control at least once every two years, 
including examining the adequacy of security arrangements, and report the 
results of the inspection to the CO on the Periodical Stock Inspection Report 
(GF 238); and if necessary, also on the Departmental Stocktaking-Schedule of 
Discrepancies (GF 241); and 
 
 
(b) 
carry out surprise stock and security checks at irregular intervals at least once 
every three months unless DGL has authorised otherwise.  However, if it is 
impractical or not cost-effective for him to inspect each and every store unit, 
he should ensure that the respective head of the unit concerned or his deputy 
will conduct such checks.  In all cases, the public officer conducting the check 
should properly record the findings in the Surprise Inspection Book (GF 235). 
 

CHAPTER IX 
 
COLLECTION AND DELIVERY OF STORES 
FROM SUPPLIERS OUTSIDE HONG KONG 
 
GENERAL 
 
900.   
DGL may assist departments to receive specialised stores, such as arms and 
ammunition, consigned by suppliers outside Hong Kong.   
 
905.   
When a department receives any bill of lading or airway bill addressed directly 
to it, the responsible officer of the department should endorse the bill “For delivery to the 
Director of Government Logistics” by signing on behalf of his CO and then forward it to the 
DGL. 
 
HANDLING OF CONSIGNED GOODS RECEIVED BY THE DIRECTOR OF 
GOVERNMENT LOGISTICS 
 
915.   
The requisitioning department should retain all packing materials in separate 
lots and maintain a record of all related documents until the actual receipt of all the stores said 
to have been delivered.  In the event of loss, these packing materials can be used for checking 
the gross and net weight of the particular package against the weights given in the shipping 
documents. 
 
RECEIPT OF STORES 
 
920.   
Immediately upon receipt of stores from the DGL or directly from suppliers 
outside Hong Kong, departments should take on charge the full quantity of stores shown on 
the invoices. 
 
INSPECTION OF STORES RECEIVED 
 
925.   
Department should raise an Inspection Report of Goods Received (Imported) 
(GF 280) and inspect the stores received — 
 
 
(a) 
within seven days of delivery in respect of general stores; and 
 
 
(b) 
within 30 days of delivery or as specified in the terms of order/contract in 
respect of stores requiring special testing procedures. 
 
930.   
Immediately after the inspection, the department will complete the relevant 
sections of the Inspection Report of Goods Received (Imported) giving details of any 
differences between the stores actually received and those listed in the invoices or packing 
lists and of any losses or damages of stores.  For stores received through the GLD, the 
department should send a copy of the Inspection Report of Goods Received (Imported) to the 
DGL. 
 

CLAIMS 
 
935.   
If stores ordered are not received in good order and condition, and if the loss or 
damage exceeds $1,000, or if essential accessories or parts of any equipment, regardless of 
their value, are not received in good order and condition, the department concerned should 
immediately — 
 
 
(a) 
submit a Claims Report (GF 296) to the DGL or notify him through the GLD’s 
Procurement and Contract Management System so that the GLD will create a 
Claim Record and lodge claims on the appropriate parties and the department 
concerned should follow the procedures set out in SPR 955-965 in the case of 
stores purchased through the GLD; or 
 
 
(b) 
lodge claims on the appropriate parties by following the procedures set out in 
SPR 950-965 in the case of stores purchased by departments direct. 
 
940.   
Departments should not consider a claim being settled until — 
 
 
(a) 
the value of the loss or damage has been recovered in full; or 
 
 
(b) 
the stores have been replaced; or 
 
 
(c) 
a write-off has been authorised. 
 
945.   
Departments should maintain a Claim Register (GF 207) for recording claims 
on account of breakages or deficiencies of stores received from sources outside Hong Kong. 
Departments should treat any broken item which cannot be repaired as a deficiency. 
 
950.   
After the claim has been settled, the department concerned will strike off 
charge the quantities of stores broken or found deficient by means of a Departmental 
Combined Requisition and Issue Voucher (GF 277) and make cross reference with the Claim 
Register. 
 
955.   
The DGL will follow the accounting procedures outlined below when dealing 
with claims in respect of stores ordered by/through the department — 
 
 
(a) 
Debit the cost of the stores to the appropriate subhead of expenditure. 
 
 
(b) 
Prepare a Claim Record Card on receipt of a claim through Procurement and 
Contract Management System or GF 296 from the requisitioning department. 
 
 
(c) 
(i) 
If the exact amount to be claimed is known, raise a journal transfer 
crediting the appropriate subhead of the requisitioning department and 
debiting “Advances—Claims”.  After the liable party has settled the 
claim, credit the amount to clear the Advance Account.  This is 
regardless of whether the claim is settled in the same or subsequent 
financial year. 
 

 
 
(ii)  If the exact amount to be claimed is not known (e.g. for broken or 
damaged parts of plant, instruments or other equipment where the value 
of the parts will not be known until after receipt of the required 
replacement invoice or claims for refund of repair, alteration and 
associated charges and where the charges cannot be ascertained until 
after completion of the jobs or where the claim is in a foreign currency), 
allocate the credit received direct to the appropriate subhead if received 
within the same financial year, or to revenue if received in a subsequent 
year. 
 
 
(d) 
Debit the cost of any subsequent replacements to the appropriate subhead of 
the requisitioning department. 
 
 
(e) 
If the liable party admits liability and the supplier provides a free replacement, 
irrespective of whether this is done in the same or subsequent financial year, 
the DGL will take no further action.  Except where an Advance Account has 
been opened under (c)(i) above, the DGL will reverse the original entry by 
journal transfer, forwarding the original and three copies to the requisitioning 
department.  On receipt of the free replacement, the department concerned will 
accept the debit by retaining the quadruplicate and forwarding the original and 
duplicate to the DAS, and the triplicate to the DGL. 
 
960.   
When dealing with claims in respect of stores purchased by departments direct, 
departments should follow the accounting procedures outlined in SPR 955(a), (c), (d) and (e). 
Whenever necessary, departments may write to the DAS for the opening of an Advance 
Account for debiting the amount to be claimed, and should credit the Advance Account 
immediately after the claims have been settled. 
 
965.   
Departments may not lodge claims on the appropriate parties if the amount of 
breakages or deficiencies of stores received does not exceed $1,000 ledger value, and the 
stores involved are not essential.  Under such circumstances, departments may write off the 
items in accordance with SPR 1040(b). 
 

CHAPTER X 
 
STOCK VERIFICATION AND WRITE-OFF 
 
STOCK VERIFICATION 
 
1000.  (a) 
The following bodies may verify the stocks of government stores held by 
departments on ledger charge — 
 
 
 
(i) 
Supplies Surveys and Stock Verification Section of GLD; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
Board of Survey appointed by DGL; 
 
 
 
(iii)  Departmental Stock Verification Team appointed by the CO; and 
 
 
 
(iv)  Special Board of Survey appointed by the Chief Secretary for 
Administration. 
 
 
(b) 
Except in the case of a Special Board of Survey, DGL determines the checking 
and verifying criteria for verification of stocks of government stores by the 
bodies listed in SPR 1000(a).  PS(Tsy)  may amend or make exceptions to the 
prescribed criteria. 
 
GLD Supplies Surveys and Stock Verification Section  
 
1005. (a) 
The Supplies Surveys and Stock Verification Section of GLD verifies 
completely or randomly stocks of government stores held by departments 
according to prescribed criteria at least once every three years. 
 
 
(b) 
The DGL lays down the procedures for the supplies surveys and stock 
verification exercises conducted by the Supplies Surveys and Stock 
Verification Section of the GLD.  The terms of reference of the Section are as 
follows – 
 
 
 
(i) 
to compare ledger balances with quantities found in stock and to report 
any discrepancies; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(ii) 
to examine the general conditions of the stores held in stock and the 
stock control system with particular reference to dormant and excessive 
stocks; 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(iii)  to advise on the arrangements for the security of stores; and 
 
 
 
(iv)  to conduct compliance checks on stores management and procurement 
activities performed by the departments to ensure compliance with the 
Regulations and other relevant instructions. 
 

 
(c) 
On completion of the supplies survey and stock verification exercise, the DGL 
should forward a report on details of the findings together with 
recommendation to the CO concerned for follow up action and making 
improvements, copying it to D of A. 
 
Boards of survey 
 
1010.  (a) 
DGL appoints Boards of Survey to verify stocks of government stores held by 
departments, which the Supplies Surveys and Stock Verification Section of 
GLD is unable to verify within the approved checking period stipulated in 
SPR 1005(a).  Unless the DGL has authorised otherwise, such Boards do not 
include any staff of the department concerned, and their terms of reference are 
as follows — 
 
 
 
(i) 
to confirm that the balances of stores on charge are actually in stock and 
to report any discrepancies; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
to report on any stores which are found not taken on charge; and 
 
 
 
(iii)  to report on the general conditions of stores in stock. 
 
 
(b) 
On completion of the survey, the Chairman of the Board should submit to the 
DGL a Report of Board of Survey on Stores (GF 236), attaching a 
Departmental Stocktaking Schedule of Discrepancies (GF 241). 
 
 
(c) 
DGL should forward the Report (GF 236) to the CO concerned for necessary 
action required under SPR 1030-1065, copying it to D of A. 
 
Departmental stock verification team 
 
1015.  (a) 
In addition to the stock verification by either the Supplies Surveys and Stock 
Verification Section of GLD or Boards of Survey, CO may appoint public 
officers of his department to inspect and verify completely stocks of all items 
held on ledger charge in all stores under his control by following the 
procedures set out in (b) and (c) below. 
 
 
(b) 
Unless otherwise approved by the DGL, the appointed officers should inspect 
and verify — 
 
 
 
(i) 
progressively, in the case of large store, ensuring that each item is 
checked at least once every three years.  COs should, where necessary, 
arrange more frequent verifications and inspections to be carried out; 
 
 
 
(ii)  completely, stores by stores in the case of small stores, at least once a 
year, and preferably about six months after the last verification by either 
the Supplies Surveys and Stock Verification Section of the GLD or a 
Board of Survey; and 
 
 
 
(iii)  completely, stores by stores, immediately prior to and immediately 
following the transfer of stores from one storage area to another. 
 

 
(c) 
The inspection and verification should include — 
 
 
 
(i) 
a comparison of the ledger balances with the actual stocks, and a report 
of the surpluses and deficiencies on a GF 241; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
an examination of the conditions of the items of stores and the manner 
in which they are stored; and 
 
 
 
(iii)  an examination of the conditions of the warehouses, yards, locks and 
fastenings for the storage of stores. 
 
1020.  
On completion of the inspection and verification in the case of either 
SPR 1015(b)(ii) or (b)(iii), and monthly in the case of SPR 1015(b)(i), the appointed officers 
forward their reports together with recommendations, on the Departmental Stocktaking 
Report (GF 237), to the CO concerned for necessary action required under SPR 1030-1065 in 
respect of any discrepancies. 
 
Special boards of survey 
 
1025.  (a) 
The Chief Secretary for Administration may appoint a Special Board of 
Survey where there is reason to believe that losses of stores have been caused 
by fraud or gross negligence, or in other circumstances as deemed necessary. 
The Chief Secretary for Administration will determine the specific terms of 
reference and responsibilities of the Board. 
 
 
(b) 
On completion of the survey, the Chairman shall prepare a report containing a 
detailed account of the findings and recommendations of the Board in 
accordance with the specific terms of reference, and forward the report, in 
quadruplicate, through the DGL who detaches one copy and passes the other 
three to the Chief Secretary for Administration with his comments. 
 
PROCEDURES FOR DEALING WITH DISCREPANCIES 
 
1030.   
When a CO becomes aware of any discrepancies between the physical and 
ledger balances of stores under his control, he will arrange to — 
 
 
(a) 
account for any deficiencies by a Departmental Combined Requisition and 
Issue Voucher (GF 277), which should bear a reference to the appropriate 
authority for the necessary adjustment made; and 
 
 
(b) 
take on charge any surplus by a Departmental Stores Return Note (GF 278). 
 
1035. (a) 
The CO concerned should report immediately in writing all cases of loss or 
deficiency where fraud, suspected fraud or negligence is involved to the DGL, 
copying it to PS(Tsy), DAS and D of A.  The CO concerned should make a 
report to the police if the losses or deficiencies involve a criminal act or 
suspected criminal act. 
 

 (b) 
The CO should then investigate the loss or deficiency and forward his report, 
to be supported by the police report if appropriate, to the DGL, copying it to 
PS(Tsy), DAS and D of A.  He has to include in the report his 
recommendations for clearing the loss or deficiency, any necessary action 
taken against the public officer(s) responsible, and a statement of the steps 
taken to prevent a recurrence.  Where appropriate, he should submit monthly 
reports on the progress of the investigation. 
 
 (c) 
Where appropriate, the DGL may conduct  enquiries into the loss or 
deficiency, and submit his recommendations to the PS(Tsy), copying them to 
DAS and D of A. 
 
 
(d) 
Where negligence (but not fraud or suspected fraud) is involved and the value 
of the lost items does not exceed $50,000, the CO, after conducting an 
investigation of a case of loss or deficiency in accordance with SPR 1035(b), 
may, subject to DGL’s advice, arrange to write off the loss or deficiency in 
accordance with SPR 1070 or consider asking the public officer(s) concerned 
to replace the lost or deficient stores in accordance with SPR 1075.  PS(Tsy)’s 
approval has to be sought where DGL’s advice does not agree with that of the 
CO. 
 
 
 
 (e) 
Where fraud, suspected fraud or negligence is involved, the CO should 
submit an application in respect of each case to the PS(Tsy) for the write-off 
of losses or deficiencies, using an Application for Write-off under 
SPR 1070(a)(ii) (GF 403), copying it to DAS, D of A and DGL.  Except for 
cases described in (f) below, this procedure should be followed, irrespective of 
the amount involved. 
 
 
(f) 
For the purposes of write-off, departments should treat any loss arising from 
theft or suspected theft as a loss involving fraud or negligence on the part of a 
public officer.  The only exception for this treatment is when such a loss does 
not exceed $50,000 in value, for which departments may, on completion of a 
departmental investigation, write off departmentally on a Record of Lost or 
Deficient Stores Written-off (GF 190) in accordance with the authorities stated 
in SPR 1070(a)(i). 
 
1040. (a) 
Where no fraud, suspected fraud or negligence is involved but where the 
amount in any one case exceeds $750,000
, the CO has to submit an 
application to the PS(Tsy) as soon as possible for the write-off of losses or 
deficiencies, using an Application for Write-off under SPR 1070(b)(v) 
(GF 402), copying it to DAS, D of A and DGL with supporting information set 
out in Annex B of FC No. 5/2017. 
 
 (b) 
Where no fraud, suspected fraud or negligence is involved and where the 
amount of loss or deficiency in any one case does not exceed $750,000
, COs 
may write off such an amount on a GF 
190 in accordance with 
SPR 1070(b)(i)-(iv).  When approving the write-off, the public officer with the 
delegated authority needs to sign on the GF 190 personally and certify in each 
case that — 
 

 
 
(i) 
no fraud, suspected fraud or negligence is involved; 
 
 
 
(ii) 
an investigation and a record have been made of the circumstances and, 
where appropriate, steps have been taken to prevent a recurrence; 
 
 
 
(iii)  the amount is not in excess of his delegated authority; and 
 
 
 
(iv)  he is satisfied that the stores are irrecoverable. 
 
 
(c) 
Departments should submit a half-yearly return to the PS(Tsy) on the Half 
Yearly Return of Lost or Deficient Stores Written-off under SPR 1040(b) 
(GF 401), showing the description and amount written off in respect of each 
case during the first/second half of a financial year.  Returns must be submitted 
within two months after the end of the reporting period, with copies to the 
DAS, D of A and DGL.  A nil return is required. 
 
1045.   
In respect of deficiencies appearing in the Stock Movement Journal of the 
GLD, the DGL has the authority to write off deficiencies up to a value of $50,000 in any one 
month, provided that such deficiencies are not caused by fraud, suspected fraud or negligence. 
 
1050.   
If any surplus stock of a value exceeding $50,000 in respect of one store is 
found, the CO will report to the DGL, and copy it to PS(Tsy), DAS and D of A. 
 
1055.   
For the purpose of these Regulations, “value” means the GLD stock price or 
the original purchase cost or, where neither of these can easily be determined, the replacement 
cost. 
 
1060.   
COs are responsible for investigating the practicability of protective measures 
for safeguarding government property. 
 
1065.   
These Regulations, in no way, inhibit the DAS, D of A or DGL from 
conducting an investigation into any losses or deficiencies which they consider necessary. 
 
AUTHORITY FOR WRITE-OFF OF LOST/DEFICIENT STORES 
 
1070.   
The authorities for approving the write-off of any loss or deficiency of stores 
are as follows — 
 
 
(a) 
Where caused by fraud, suspected fraud or negligence of a public officer — 
 
 
 
(i) 
in respect of cases involving theft or suspected theft as described in 
SPR 1035(f) — 
 
 
 
 
Value of stores in each case or  
 
in respect of any one cause 
Authority 
 
 
 
 
Not exceeding $10,000 
  Deputy/Assistant 
Head 
of 
Department/ Bureau of D2/DL2 
rank or above 
 

 
 
 
Not exceeding $50,000 
  Head of Department/ Bureau or 
CO personally (irrespective of 
rank) 
 
 
 
(ii) 
in all other cases – 
 
 
 
 
Not exceeding $500,000 
PS(Tsy) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Exceeding 
$500,000 
Finance Committee of the 
Legislative Council 
 
 
 
 
(b) 
Where not caused by fraud, suspected fraud or negligence of a public officer 
(with the exception of those cases described in SPR 1045) — 
 
 
 
 
Value of stores in each case or  
 
in respect of any one cause 
Authority 
 
 
 
(i) 
Not exceeding $7,500 
 
Departmental  Secretary  ranked 
at or above Point 45 of the 
Master Pay Scale or other public 
officers of equivalent rank who 
oversee stores and supplies 
matters as designated by CO 
 
 
 
(ii) 
Not exceeding $30,000 
 
Directorate  Officer  of  D1/DL1 
rank 
 
 
 
(iii)  Not exceeding $150,000 
 
Deputy/Assistant 
Head 
of 
Department of D2/DL2 rank or 
above 
 
 
 
(iv)  Not exceeding $750,000 
 
Head  of  Department/Bureau  or 
CO personally 
 
  (v) 
Exceeding 
$750,000 
 
PS(Tsy) 
 
REPLACEMENT OF STORES 
 
1075.  
The CO, or his designated directorate officer of seniority at least one 
substantive rank higher than the public officer(s) involved in the loss or deficiency, may 
approve the replacement of the lost or deficient item(s) by the public officer(s) concerned 
provided – 
 
 (a) 
no fraud or suspected fraud is involved, 
 
 (b) 
the total value of such loss or deficiency does not exceed $50,000 in value, 
and 
 
 
(c) 
the CO or his designated directorate officer is satisfied that replacement by the 
public officer(s) would be reasonable  having regard to the duty to protect 
public funds and the circumstances leading to the loss or deficiency. 
 

In these cases, when the public officer concerned has replaced the loss or deficiency on 
repayment basis, no write-off of such loss or deficiency on GF 190 is necessary.  The DSM 
will support the replacement issue from stock by a Departmental Combined Requisition and 
Issue Voucher (GF 277), with the relevant demand note number quoted thereon. 
 
SURCHARGE 
 
 
 
1080.  (a) 
The CO, after conducting an investigation in accordance with SPR 1035(b), 
may recommend in his report to the PS(Tsy) to surcharge the public officer 
concerned under section 32 of the Public Finance Ordinance for the deficiency 
in, or loss or destruction of, or damage to stores for which he is responsible. 
Unless otherwise authorised by the PS(Tsy), departments should calculate the 
proposed charge as follows — 
 
 
 
(i) 
for new items—the current replacement cost plus an additional charge 
of 20% for overheads; 
 
 
 
(ii)  for used items—the greater of the scrap value or the depreciated value 
of the item(s), plus an additional charge of 20% for overheads; and 
 
 
 
(iii)  for damaged items which are not beyond economical repair—the cost of 
repair plus an additional charge of 20% for overheads. 
 
 
(b) 
The depreciated value of an item is calculated using the following formula — 
 
 
 
unexpired useful life span   
current replacement cost × 
 
 
useful life span 
 
 
 
 
 
(c) 
The current replacement cost, life span, scrap value and repair cost of an item 
are determined by the GLD and the specialist department(s) responsible for the 
procurement, maintenance or repair of the item.  Where the item is out of 
production, or the current replacement cost for the item is unknown, the 
current price of the equivalent substitution will be used for calculating the 
replacement cost.  In case a public officer objects to the Government’s 
valuation, he may, at his own expense, appoint an independent valuer 
approved by the Government for the purpose of proposing an alternative 
valuation.  The valuation made by this independent valuer will be binding on 
both the public officer and the Government. 
 
1085.   
The PS(Tsy) shall process all cases referred to in SPR 1080 in accordance with 
the guidelines and procedures set out in the prevailing FC on surcharge. 
 

CHAPTER XI 
 
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS STORES 
 
SCOPE 
 
1100.   
These regulations apply to the disposal of store items that have become surplus 
to the requirements of a department.  They cover all stores, inventory as well as non-inventory 
items which are serviceable or otherwise.  Items that can be used for trade-in purposes are not 
counted as surplus stores. 
 
DEPARTMENTAL DISPOSAL AUTHORITY 
 
1105.   
Each CO shall appoint a Departmental Disposal Committee (DDC) comprising 
a chairman who is a public officer at or above senior professional level and at least two other 
members (at or above the rank of an Assistant Supplies Officer or Executive Officer II or 
equivalent) from within his department. 
 
1106.   
A DDC may approve the disposal of surplus stores items with a value at or 
below the quotation limit for procurement of stores specified in SPR 220(a).  A DDC may 
sub-delegate its work relating to the disposal of non-inventory unserviceable stores items to 
designated officers not lower than the rank of an Assistant Supplies Officer or Executive 
Officer II or equivalent.  CO or a directorate officer designated by him may, on the 
recommendation of the DDC, approve the disposal of surplus stores items exceeding the 
approval limit of the DDC.  
 
1107.   
“Value” means the GLD stock price or the original purchase cost or, where 
neither of these can easily be determined, the replacement cost.  The threshold specified in 
SPR 1106 may apply to the value of each individual surplus stores item or if there are separate 
items, the collective value of all the items concerned in each case or in respect of any one 
cause. 
 
1108.   
A CO may decide the exact mode of operation for his DDC provided that the 
DDC operates in a transparent manner and sufficient checks and balances are in place. 
 
DISPOSAL PROCEDURES 
 
1110.   
Departments shall follow the key steps summarised below and explained in 
greater detail through other regulations in this Chapter — 
 

 
 
Disposal of Surplus Stores 
 
 
Surplus store item 
 
 
 
 
Is it an inventory item 
 
under 
SPR 710 or 775? 
Yes 
No 
 
(Inventory) 
(Non-inventory) 
 
 
 
Is it 
Is it 
 
serviceable 
serviceable 
 
(SPR 1115)? 
(SPR 1115)? 
No 
No 
 
Yes 
Yes 
 
  
 
DDA may 
 
dispose of the 
Is it covered 
item by dumping 
by GLD 
Is it a GLD 
 
(SPR1120) 
term 
unallocated 
 
contract or 
store item 
waiver list? 
(SPR 1130)? 
 
 
 
 
Yes 
No 
No 
Yes 
 
 
  DDA may 
Return to GLD 
dispose of the 
Does it have 
(SPR 875) 
  item by 
residual value 
  dumping 
(SPR 1126)? 
 (SPR1125) 
 
No 
Yes 
 
 
 
DDA may 
Notify GLD to post a notice  
 
dispose of the 
on CCGO 
item by 
 
(SPR 1135) 
dumping 
 
(SPR 1126) 
 
 
 
Is it 
 
wanted? 
 
Yes 
No 
 
 
 
Consider disposal through 
Consider disposal through 
 
Arrange transfer under 
donation, commercial disposal, or 
donation, commercial disposal, or 
 
SPR 1136 
as last resort, dumping under 
as last resort, dumping under 
SPR 1137-1151 
 
SPRs 1137-1151 
 
 
 

DISPOSAL OF UNSERVICEABLE STORES ITEMS 
 
1115.   
The decision on whether or not a surplus stores item is serviceable rests with 
the departmental disposal authority (DDA) which, depending on the value of the stores items 
to be disposed, may be the DDC or a designated officer specified in SPR 1106. 
 
Non-inventory 
 
1120.   
A DDA may arrange to dump a non-inventory stores item which is found to be 
unserviceable, i.e. unsuitable for use either because it is worn out or broken and is certified by 
the supplier, competent technician or technical department to be beyond economical repair; or 
because it is technically obsolete. 
 
Inventory 
 
1125.   
A DDA may dispose of an unserviceable inventory store item — 
 
 (a) 
by selling it to a term contractor if it is an article or material covered by the 
disposal term contracts arranged by the GLD; or 
 
 (b) 
by dumping it direct if it is of such low value as to be covered by a waiver list 
which the GLD regularly publishes on its webpage. 
 
1126.   
If the unserviceable inventory stores item is not covered by SPR 1125 and the 
DDA considers that it may have residual value of some kind (for display, training, or 
preservation, etc.), the DDA shall arrange for its disposal in accordance with SPR 1135-1151. 
Otherwise, the DDA may dispose of the item by dumping. 
 
DISPOSAL OF SERVICEABLE STORES ITEMS 
 
GLD unallocated stores items 
 
1130.   
A DDA should return serviceable GLD unallocated stores items to the GLD in 
accordance with SPR 875.  A DDA shall follow the procedures set out in SPR 1135-1151 for 
the disposal of all serviceable allocated stores items, inventory as well as non-inventory. 
 
Items that may be wanted by other departments 
 
1135.   
If a surplus stores item under SPR 1126 or 1130 is available, a DDA should 
ascertain whether it is needed within other parts of the Government, by requesting the DGL to 
post a notice on the Central Cyber Government Office (CCGO) to publicise the availability of 
the surplus stores item.  The releasing department should provide details on the condition of 
the surplus stores items (including whether they are still serviceable, and whether spare parts 
are available, etc.) and a contact point for follow-up enquiries.  The DGL updates the relevant 
website at least once a week and posts individual notices of availability on the CCGO for no 
less than ten working days. 
 

1136.   
If another department indicates interest in receiving the concerned surplus 
stores item the releasing and receiving departments should make their own arrangements for 
transfer and reconciliation of necessary accounts and inventory lists, etc., in line with 
SPR 865.  The same procedures will apply to the transfer of surplus stores items between 
trading funds and government departments, except that such a transfer may be subject to a 
charge on the receiving department; the proposed level of charges should be made on the 
notice.  The releasing department should consider competing bids for surplus stores items on a 
first-come-first-served basis. 
 
1137.   
When, after action is taken under SPR 1135, a DDA establishes that a surplus 
stores item is not wanted within the Government, it shall consider whether to dispose of it 
through donation, commercial disposal or dumping.  Donation and commercial disposal 
should be considered in parallel and the final decision depends on the merits of each case.  In 
general, factors including the residual value, resaleable value and the public interest should be 
taken into consideration.  On the resaleable value, advice from DGL should be sought where 
appropriate. 
 
Donation 
 
1140.   
A DDA may, either at its own initiative or upon request, donate a surplus 
stores item to non-government organisations subject to the following conditions — 
 
 
(a) 
the recipient organisations must be established solely or principally for 
educational, scientific, cultural or charitable purpose; 
 
 
(b) 
the recipient organisations will only use the surplus stores items for 
non-profit-making purpose; and  
 
 
(c) 
the provision of surplus stores items will not have any capital or recurrent 
expenditure implications on the Government. 
 
1141.   
If the value of the surplus stores items to be donated exceeds $200,000 in each 
case or in respect of any one cause, the releasing department must seek the prior approval of 
PS(Tsy). 
 
1142.   
The prior approval of the Finance Committee must be sought for a donation 
that does not meet the conditions specified in SPR 1140. 
 
1143.   
If a DDA decides to make a donation of surplus stores items, it may liaise with 
the relevant non-government organisations either directly or through the DGL as co-ordinator. 
If the non-government organisations agree to receive the surplus stores items, the releasing 
department should directly arrange to issue the items to the organisations concerned after 
obtaining the necessary approval provided under SPR 1140-1142.  The releasing department 
should provide details of the donation (e.g. the name of the recipient organisations, the 
description of stores items and the quantity) to the DGL for record. 
 
1144.   
If there are more applications for surplus serviceable stores items than the 
stock of stores available, the DGL will advise the releasing department concerned as to whom 
and what surplus stores items and quantities to be donated, having regard to the past donation 
records to ensure equity. 
 

Commercial disposal 
 
1145.   
If a DDA considers that a surplus stores item has saleable value, it shall request 
the DGL to arrange for commercial disposal of the stores item.  DGL may advise the 
department to sell the stores item to the GLD disposal term contractors direct or arrange for a 
quotation, a tender or an auction exercise, having due regard to the value of the stores item 
and the cost-effectiveness of various disposal options.  Under exceptional circumstances, 
departments may seek PS(Tsy)’s approval for selling their surplus stores by means other than 
those set out in this Regulation.  Application should be submitted through DGL with full 
justifications. 
 
Dumping 
 
1150.   
If a DDA is satisfied that a surplus stores item, which has been established as 
not wanted within the Government, is not fit for donation, and commercial disposal is not 
cost-effective, it may arrange to dump the item. 
 
1151.   
If a department decides to dump a surplus stores item that does not fully meet 
the foregoing conditions, it shall seek the prior consent of DGL who, if in doubt, shall consult 
PS(Tsy). 
 
PROPER ACCOUNTING FOR STORES 
 
1155.   
Whatever the method of disposal, COs are responsible to ensure that the 
movement of stores is properly recorded and accounted for, in line with the requirements in 
Chapter VII of these Regulations (Accounting for Stores) and for items dumped, follow the 
format set out at Appendix VII. 
 

CHAPTER XII 
 
DISPOSAL OF DANGEROUS OR CONFISCATED GOODS 
 
DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS IN A DANGEROUS CONDITION 
 
1200.  (a) 
When CO considers that any materials under his control are in dangerous 
condition and might endanger life or property, he may authorise immediate 
disposal of the materials.  He should consult the Director of Fire Services, 
Government Chemist, or Senior Physicist in-charge, Radiation Health Unit of 
the Department of Health as appropriate. 
 
 
(b) 
CO should keep proper records on all such disposals, following the format set 
out at Appendix VII. 
 
DISPOSAL OF CONFISCATED GOODS 
 
1205.   
The department which initiates the confiscation of goods under the relevant 
legislation will hand over all the goods confiscated to those departments ultimately 
responsible for their disposal in accordance with the relevant legislation and/or standing 
instruction from the Financial Secretary (see SPR 1215 and 1220). 
 
1210.   
When handing over the confiscated goods, the department should present a 
Confiscation Order (GF 83), bearing reference to the legislation or authority (either a Court or 
a public officer empowered by the relevant ordinance) under which the confiscation has been 
ordered.  The Confiscation Order should be distributed as follows — 
 
 
 
Original 
—  To the officer-in-charge of the case for attachment to the 
charge sheet or relevant document. 
 
 
 
Duplicate 
—  To be retained by the office which issues the GF 83. 
 
 
 
Triplicate 
—  To the department which receives the confiscated goods 
to support entry in the forfeited goods ledger. 
 
 
 
Quadruplicate  —  To the department which initiates the confiscation. 
 
1215.   
The following departments are responsible for the disposal of the specific 
categories of confiscated goods — 
 
 
 
Department   Confiscated 
Goods 
 
 
 
Agriculture, Fisheries and (a) Tree 
Wood 
Conservation Department 
 
  
(b) 
Fish 
 
 
 
 
 
    Civil Engineering and 
(c)  All dangerous goods listed in Category 
Development Department  
I of the Dangerous Goods (Application 
and Exemption) Regulations 
(Cap. 295) other than ammunition 
 
 
 
 
 

 
 
 
(d) Minerals (confiscated under the 
Mining Ordinance (Cap. 285)) 
 
 
 
 
 
  Customs and Excise 
(e)  All goods including kerosene, gasoline 
Department 
and diesel fuel, to which the Dutiable 
Commodities Ordinance (Cap. 
109) 
applies, and rice and dried food not fit 
for human consumption  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
EMSD 
(f)  Liquefied petroleum gas as prescribed 
in the Gas Safety Ordinance (Cap. 51) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Fire Services Department 
(g)  All dangerous goods listed in the 
Dangerous Goods (Application and 
Exemption) Regulations (Cap. 
295) 
other than those in Category I, 
kerosene, gasoline and diesel fuel, and 
liquefied petroleum gas as prescribed 
in the Gas Safety Ordinance (Cap. 51) 
 
 
 
Food and Environmental 
(h)  Perishable goods for destruction 
Hygiene Department 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Hong Kong Police Force 
(i)  Arms and ammunition 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(j)  Counterfeit currency (bank notes and 
coins) as prescribed in Standing 
Accounting Instruction 1971 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Hong Kong Police Force or  (k)  Dangerous drugs paraphernalia 
Customs and Excise 
Department 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Hong Kong Police Force or  (l)  Dangerous drugs as prescribed in the 
Department of Health 
Dangerous Drugs Ordinance 
(Cap. 134) and dried food not fit for 
human consumption 
 
 
 
Treasury 
(m)  Currency as prescribed in Standing 
Accounting Instruction 1970 
 
 
 
 
 
1220.   
DGL is responsible for the disposal of any other confiscated goods not listed in 
SPR 1215.  The department which initiates the confiscation will report to the DGL who, after 
assessing the transportation and storage costs likely to be incurred, will decide on the most 
appropriate disposal method and arrangements. 
 
1225.   
The following COs are empowered to destroy the specific categories of goods 
which are confiscated under the relevant ordinances — 
 
 
 
 

 
 
CO 
 
Confiscated Goods 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Commissioner of Customs  (a)  Goods of a perishable nature or the sale 
and Excise 
of which will give rise to a harmful 
effect to the public  
Import and Export Ordinance (Cap. 60) 
 
 
 
 
(b) Obscene books, films, magazines, 
photographs, etc. 
Post Office Ordinance (Cap. 98) 
 
 
 
 
(c)  Goods bearing a forged trade mark or to 
which a false trade description is 
applied and where obliteration of such 
markings or description is inapplicable  
Trade Descriptions Ordinance 
(Cap. 362) 
 
 
 
 
(d) 
Items infringing copyrights and 
unsuitable for public sale  
Copyright Ordinance (Cap. 528) and 
Prevention of Copyright Piracy 
Ordinance (Cap. 544) 
 
 
 
Commissioner of Customs  (e) Controlled chemicals Note 1 
and Excise and Commissioner 
Control of Chemicals Ordinance 
of Police 
(Cap. 145)  
 
 
 
 
(f) Obscene publications, video tapes, 
video compact discs, photographs, 
etc. Note 2 
Control of Obscene and Indecent 
Articles Ordinance (Cap. 390)
  
 
 
 
Commissioner of Customs  (g) Indecent articles not complying with 
and Excise, Commissioner of 
statutory requirements for their 
Police and Director of Film, 
publication Note 2 
Newspaper and Article 
Control of Obscene and Indecent 
Administration 
Articles Ordinance (Cap. 390) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Commissioner of Police and  (h)  Hawker’s equipment, carts, trolleys and 
Director of Food and 
stalls  
Environmental Hygiene 
Public Health and Municipal Services 
Ordinance (Cap. 132) 
 
  Note 
1.  Exceptions — 
Chemicals which are suitable for laboratory use such as cholesterol test, or 
having a saleable value, will be dealt with in accordance with SPR 1220.  
 
 
 

  2.  Exceptions — 
Machinery or apparatus for projecting or showing and/or plates, 
instruments or utensils used for printing which are considered suitable for 
public sale, will be dealt with in accordance with SPR 1220. 
 
 
 
1230.  
In the case of perishable goods handed over to recognised charitable 
institutions, the releasing department will require the receiving institution to sign the triplicate 
of GF 83 and return it to the issuing department.  In such cases, the quadruplicate of GF 83 
will not be used. 
 
1235.   
In the case of goods earmarked for destruction, public officers carrying out the 
destruction will certify destruction on the triplicate of GF 83, and in such cases, the 
quadruplicate of GF 83 will not be used. 
 

Appendices 
 
Appendix I 
(A)  Specimen Declaration and Undertakings by Public Officers Involved 
in Preparing Tender Documentation (including Tender 
Specifications and Marking Schemes), Assessing Tenders and 
Conducting Tender Negotiations 
 
 (B) 
Specimen Undertakings by Head or Chairperson, Members and/or 
Secretary of Tender Opening Teams/Departmental Tender 
Committees/Departmental Consultants Selection 
Committees/Tender Boards/Consultants Selection Boards 
 
 (C) 
Declaration and Undertakings by Technical Advisor who are not 
Public Officers 
 
 
 
Appendix II 
 
Endorsement Authorities and Procurement Agents for Specific 
Stores 
 
Appendix III 
(A)  Specimen Notice for Approved Lists of Qualified 
Contractors/Suppliers/Service Providers for Selective Tendering 
 
 (B) 
Specimen Application for Authority to Prequalify Tenderers 
 
 (C) 
Specimen Gazette Notice for Prequalification of Tenderers 
 
 (D) 
Specimen Application for Approval of Prequalified Tenderers 
 
 (E) 
Specimen Gazette Tender Notices 
 
 (E)1 
Note to Tenderers 
(to be included in tender documents for tenders covered by 
WTO GPA) 
 
 (E)2 
Note to Tenderers and Condition of Tender 
(to be included in tender documents for tenders invited from 
contractors/suppliers/service providers in both the private and public 
sectors including department(s) of the Government of the Hong 
Kong Special Administrative Region whose operation of the 
services is managed and accounted for by trading funds established 
pursuant to the Trading Funds Ordinance, Cap. 430) 
 
 (F) 
Guidelines for Drawing Up Tender Specifications 
 
 (G) 
Guidelines for Adopting a Marking Scheme for Tender Evaluation 
 
 (G)1 
Guidelines on Tender Assessment Panel 
 
 
 
 (H) 
Guidelines for Financial Vetting of Recommended Tenderers for 
Service Contracts 
 

 (I) 
Standard Tender Report Format 
 
 (J) 
Guidelines for Tender and Contract Negotiations 
 
Appendix IV 
(A)  Specimen Submission for CCSB Stage 1 Approval 
 
 (B) 
Specimen Submission for CCSB Stage 2 Approval 
 
Appendix V 
(A)  Guidance Notes on Execution of Contracts 
 
 (B) 
Schedule of Authorities for Variation of Contracts 
 
 (C) 
Guidelines for Monitoring Performance of Consultants Appointed 
under the Central Consultants Selection Board Procedures 
 
Appendix VI 
 
Guidelines for Keeping Stores Records and Issuing Stores 
 
Appendix VII 
 
List of Stores for Dumping 
 

 
Appendix I (A) 
 
Declaration and Undertakings by Public Officers Involved 
in Preparing Tender Documentation (including Tender Specifications 
and Marking Schemes), Assessing Tenders and 
Conducting Tender Negotiations 
(SPR 186)  
 
[Tender Reference and Subject] 
 
 
 
I hereby declare that there is no conflict of interest, whether actual, potential or 
perceived, between my official duties to the Government in relation to the captioned tender 
exercise, including without limitation those in relation to the preparation of the tender 
documentation (including tender specifications and marking schemes), the assessment of 
tenders and the conduct of negotiations, and my financial, professional, commercial, personal 
or other interests. 
 
2. 
 
I undertake to — 
 
 
(a)  hold in strict confidence all tender information that I have access to 
through my official duties to the Government in relation to the captioned 
tender exercise, including without limitation those in relation to the 
preparation of the tender documentation (including tender specifications 
and marking schemes), the assessment of tenders and the conduct of 
negotiations.  Tender information includes details of tenders received 
and any other sensitive, restricted or confidential information relating to 
a tender; 
 
 
(b)  refrain from making any unauthorised disclosure or taking advantage of 
any tender information referred to in paragraph 2(a) above whether or 
not for personal gain; 
 
 
(c)  declare any actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest with my 
official duties to the Government in relation to the captioned tender 
exercise, including without limitation those in relation to the preparation 
of the tender documentation (including tender specifications and 
marking schemes), the assessment of tenders and the conduct of 
negotiations immediately when I become aware of any such conflict; 
and 
 
 
(d)  take steps to avoid any conflict of interest with any potential tenderer or 
tenderer by not putting myself in a position of obligation towards any of 
them; for example, by not accepting any favour or lavish or excessive 
entertainment, and not over-socialising with any of them. 
 
3. 
 
The undertakings in paragraphs 2(a) and (b) above shall not apply — 
 
 
(a) 
if and when the disclosure and information therein referred to becomes a 
matter of public knowledge (other than by reason of a breach of 
paragraphs 2(a) and (b) above); or 
 
 

 
 
(b)  to any communications or disclosures caused or permitted by me to 
colleagues in the Government who are or are expected to be involved in 
the course of their official duties in the captioned tender exercise or 
parts thereof. 
 
 
(c)  to disclosures of any information in circumstances where such 
disclosure is required pursuant to any law, regulation, rule of any 
relevant stock exchange, or order of a court or arbitral authority of 
competent jurisdiction. 
 
4. 
 
I understand that I may be subject to disciplinary action should I make a false 
declaration or fail to observe any of my above undertakings. 
 
 
 
Signed : 
 
Name (block letters) 
:   
Title/Rank : 
 
Date : 
 
 

 
Appendix I (B) 
 
Undertakings by Head or Chairperson, Members and/or Secretary of 
Tender Opening Teams/Departmental Tender Committees/Departmental 
Consultants Selection Committees/Tender Boards/ 
Consultants Selection Boards 
(SPR 187) 
 
 
 
I undertake to hold in strict confidence all tender information that I have access 
to through my position as a head/chairperson/member/secretary of the above Tender Opening 
Team/Departmental Tender Committee/Departmental Consultants Selection Committee/ 
Tender Board/Consultants Selection Board.  Tender information includes details of tenders 
received and any other sensitive, restricted or confidential information relating to a tender. 
 
2. 
 
I undertake not to make any unauthorised disclosure or take advantage of any 
tender information referred to in paragraph 1 above whether or not for personal gain. 
 
3. 
 
I undertake to declare any actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest 
with my official duty as a head/chairperson/member/secretary of the Tender Opening 
Team/Departmental Tender Committee/Departmental Consultants Selection Committee/ 
Tender Board/Consultants Selection Board immediately when I become aware of any such 
conflict. 
 
4. 
 
I undertake to take steps to avoid any conflict of interest with any potential 
tenderer or tenderer by not putting myself in a position of obligation towards any of them; for 
example, by not accepting any favour or lavish or excessive entertainment, and not 
over-socialising with any of them. 
 
5. 
 
I understand that I may be subject to disciplinary action should I fail to observe 
any of my above undertakings. 
 
 
 
Signed : 
 
Name (block letters) 
:   
Title/Rank : 
 
Date : 
 
 
 

 
Appendix I (C) 
 
Declaration and Undertakings by 
 Technical Advisor who are not Public Officers    
(SPR 197 and Appendix III(G)1)  
 
[Tender Reference and Subject] 
 
To:    The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region (“Government”)  
 
 
 
I hereby declare that there is no conflict of interest, whether actual, potential or 
perceived, between my role as the technical advisor in relation to the captioned tender 
exercise and my financial, professional, commercial, personal or other interests. 
 
2. 
 
I undertake to — 
 
 
(a)  hold in strict confidence all tender information that I have access to 
through my role as the technical advisor in relation to the captioned 
tender exercise.  Tender information includes details of tenders received 
and any other sensitive, restricted or confidential information relating to 
a tender; 
 
 
(b)  refrain from making any unauthorised disclosure or taking advantage of 
any tender information referred to in paragraph 2(a) above whether or 
not for personal gain; 
 
 
(c)  declare any actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest with my 
role as the technical advisor in relation to the captioned tender exercise 
immediately when I become aware of any such conflict;  
 
 
(d)  take steps to avoid any conflict of interest with any potential tenderer or 
tenderer by not putting myself in a position of obligation towards any of 
them; for example, by not accepting any favour or lavish or excessive 
entertainment, and not over-socialising with any of them; 
 
 
(e) 
perform my role as the technical advisor on a professional and impartial 
basis in accordance with applicable professional standards in the Hong 
Kong and international markets; and 
 
 
(e) 
not to offer, solicit or accept any advantage as defined in the Prevention 
of Bribery Ordinance (Cap. 201 of the Laws of Hong Kong) in relation 
to my duties as the technical advisor in the captioned tender exercise.  
 
3. 
 
The undertakings in paragraphs 2(a) and (b) above shall not apply — 
 
 
(a) 
if and when the disclosure and information therein referred to becomes a 
matter of public knowledge (other than by reason of a breach of 
paragraphs 2(a) and (b) above);  
 
 

 
 
(b)  to any communications or disclosures caused or permitted by me to the 
public officers of the Government who are or are expected to be 
involved in the course of their official duties in the captioned tender 
exercise or parts thereof; or 
 
 
(c)  to disclosures of any information in circumstances where such 
disclosure is required pursuant to any law, regulation, rule of any 
relevant stock exchange, or order of a court or arbitral authority of 
competent jurisdiction. 
 
4. 
 
I agree that in the event of any breach or threatened breach of the provisions of 
this Declaration and Undertakings, money damages are unlikely to be a sufficient remedy and 
the Government shall be entitled, in the discretion of the court, to an injunction to restrain the 
said breach or threatened breach in addition to and not in lieu of any other equitable or any 
legal relief including damages. 
 
5. 
 
Each of the provisions of this Declaration and Undertakings is severable and 
distinct from the others and, if one or more of such provisions or any part thereof is or 
becomes illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the legality and enforceability of the remainder of 
this Declaration and Undertakings shall not be affected or impaired in any way. 
 
6. 
 
This Declaration and Undertakings shall be subject to and construed in 
accordance with the laws of Hong Kong. 
 
In witness whereof, this Declaration and Undertakings has been executed and delivered as a 
deed on the date written below. 
 
Signed, sealed and delivered 

by [name of individual] on [date] 
)          [signature of individual] 
as his deed in the presence of: 
 

[affix seal] 
 
 
 
 
 
[signature of witness] 
Name: [witness name] 
Address: [witness address] 
 
 
 

 
Appendix II 
 
Endorsement Authorities and Procurement Agents for Specific Stores 
(SPR 210)  
 
Endorsement  #Procurement 
Stores 
Reference 
Authority 
Agent 
I.  Safes combined with steel filing cabinet  Secretary for 
DGL Standing  Accounting 
maintained in GLD’s unallocated stock 
Security and/or 
Instructions 1835 and 
DAS 
1845 
Security Regulations  
 
II.  Stores items not included under I. above and 
 
 
 
those items not covered by standard stores 
items available for drawing off by 
departments from GLD’s term contracts - 
(financial limits refer to unit cost of items) 
 
 
1.  Furniture and equipment items 
 
 
 
 
 
  (A) Specific furniture and equipment 
 
 
 
items regardless of costs 
 
    (a) 
All forms of receipting 
DAS 
DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
equipment 
department  Standing Accounting 
 
Instruction 216 
    (b) 
Computer 
systems/equipment 
 
 
 
 
     (i) Administrative 
computer Government 
DGL or user  Office of the Government 
systems 
Chief Information  department  Chief Information Officer 
 
Officer 
Circular No. 3/2007 
 
     (ii) 
Systems/equipment 
Government 
DGL or user  Office of the Government 
connected to existing 
Chief Information  department  Chief Information Officer 
system 
Officer 
Circular No. 3/2007 
 
 
    (c) 
Furniture 
and 
equipment 
for 
 
 
 
projects in the Public Works 
Programme except hospital, 
clinic and standard primary and 
secondary schools projects 
 
     (i) Furniture 
and 
equipment Head of user 
DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
not exceeding $5 million 
department 
department   
per department per 
 
project  
 
 
     (ii) 
Furniture 
and 
equipment Government 
DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
exceeding $5 million but 
Property 
department   
not exceeding $30 million  Administrator 
per department per 
project 
 
     (iii) 
Furniture 
and 
equipment  PS(Tsy) 
DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
costing over $30 million 
department   
per department per 
project 
 
#  For those stores with “DGL or user department” shown as the procurement agent, DGL is the procurement 
agent where the value of the stores to be procured exceeds the departmental limit set out in SPR 220(a). 
 

 
Endorsement  #Procurement 
Stores 
Reference 
Authority 
Agent 
    (d) 
Furniture 
and 
equipment 
for Secretary for 
DGL (for 
FC No. 3/2016 
hospital and clinic projects in  Health (S for 
clinic projects)  
the Public Works Programme 
Health) or other 
or user 
 
directorate 
department 
officers in Health 
 
Bureau whom S 
for Health has 
delegated such 
authority  
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    (e) 
Furniture 
and 
equipment 
for Secretary for 
DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
standard primary and secondary  Education or 
department 
schools projects in the Public  other directorate 
Works Programme 
officers in the 
 
Education Bureau 
(EDB), subject to 
the annual cost 
ceiling for 
respective school 
types specified by 
the Treasury 
Branch of the 
Financial 
Services and the 
Treasury Bureau 
or EDB 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
    (f) 
Safes 
not 
maintained 
in 
GLD’s Secretary for 
DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
unallocated stock 
Security and/or 
department  Standing Accounting 
DAS 
Instructions 1835 and 
1845 
Security Regulations  
 
    (g) 
Strongrooms/strongroom 
doors Secretary 
for DGL or user  FC No. 3/2016 
Security and/or 
department  Standing Accounting 
DAS 
Instructions 1835-1845 
Security Regulations  
 
    (h) 
Secure 
telephone 
and 
facsimile Secretary for 
DGL or user  Security Regulations  
equipment and accessories  Security 
department  General Regulations 625-
including scramblers, 
649 
encryptors and interface 
 
 
 
 
(B) Equipment items (other than those 
 
 
 
included under II.1.(A)) costing 
over $50,000 per item 
 
    (a) 
Computer 
systems/equipment 
- Government 
DGL or user  Office of the Government 
standalone systems/equipment 
Chief Information  department  Chief Information Officer 
not connected to existing 
Officer 
Circular 3/2007 
system 
 
    (b) 
Printing plants, machinery, 
 
 
 
equipment and accessories and 
reprographic equipment 
 
#  For those stores with “DGL or user department” shown as the procurement agent, DGL is the procurement 
agent where the value of the stores to be procured exceeds the departmental limit set out in SPR 220(a). 
 

 
Endorsement  #Procurement 
Stores 
Reference 
Authority 
Agent 
     (i) Photocopying 
machines 
DGL 
DGL 
or 
user 
General Regulation 600 
department 
 
     (ii) 
Optional  accessories 
DGL 
DGL or user  General Regulation 600 
(including sorting and 
department 
collating equipment) for 
standard and 
non-standard model 
photocopiers 
 
     (iii) 
Offset 
duplicators 
and 
DGL 
DGL or user  General Regulation 600 
plate makers 
department 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
     (iv) 
Folding 
machines 
DGL 
DGL or user  General Regulation 600 
 
department 
 
     (v) 
Sorting/Collating 
DGL 
DGL or user  General Regulation 600 
equipment 
department 
 
  (C) 
Radiocommunications apparatus 
Director-General  DGL or user  Cap. 106Z 
using radio frequencies^;  or an 
of 
department  General Regulation 629(2) 
apparatus that may generate radio Communications 
General Circular No. 
frequency emission exceeding the 
9/2016 
level permitted under the 
Telecommunications (Control of 
Interference) Regulations (Cap. 
106B) 
 
 2. 
Other 
items 
 
 
 
 
 
 
(A)  Vehicles and mobile plant 
 
 
 
 
    (a) 
Vehicles 
 
 
 
 
     (i) general 
purpose 
DGL DGL 
General 
Regulation 
 
236 (1) 
 
                                                 
^  Please refer to the Telecommunications (Telecommunications Apparatus) (Exemption from Licensing) Order 
(Cap. 106Z) and the list of Class Licences published at the web site of the Communication Authority 
(https://www.coms-auth.hk/en/licensing/telecommunications/class/index.html) for radiocommunications 
apparatus which do not require endorsement from the Director-General of Communications (DG Com) before 
procurement.  
 
Please refer to General Circular No. 9/2016 (as may be updated from time to time) for advice on procurement of 
radiocommunications apparatus which requires assignment of specific radio frequency by OFCA and 
endorsement from DG Com.  Once the user department obtains a valid frequency assignment from OFCA, the 
corresponding procurement of apparatus should be deemed to be endorsed by DG Com. 
 
#  For those stores with “DGL or user department” shown as the procurement agent, DGL is the procurement 
agent where the value of the stores to be procured exceeds the departmental limit set out in SPR 220(a). 
 

 
Endorsement  #Procurement 
Stores 
Reference 
Authority 
Agent 
     (ii) 
specialised 
DGL 
and 
user DGL or user  General Regulation 
department 
department or  236 (1) 
Electrical and 
Mechanical 
Services 
Trading Fund  
as mutually 
agreed 
between DGL, 
user 
department 
and Electrical 
and 
Mechanical 
Services 
Trading Fund 
 
 
 
 
(b)  Mobile plant 
User department 
DGL or 
General Regulation 
Electrical and  236 (2) 
Mechanical 
Services 
Trading Fund 
or user 
department 
 
  (B) 
Vessels 
Director of 
Director of  General Regulation 200 
 
Marine 
Marine 
 
#  For those stores with “DGL or user department” shown as the procurement agent, DGL is the procurement 
agent where the value of the stores to be procured exceeds the departmental limit set out in SPR 220(a). 
 

 
Appendix III (A) 
 
Specimen Notice for Approved Lists of Qualified 
Contractors/Suppliers/Service Providers for Selective Tendering 
(SPR 320(e)) 
 
 
 
Firms on the approved list of qualified contractors/suppliers/service providers 
for the provision of (a description of goods, services, or categories thereof) maintained by the 
(name of department) are published below for general information —   
 
(List of contractors/suppliers/service providers) 
 
 
Tender invitations will be (#published in the Government Gazette, on the 
Internet, and/or sent by letter to firms on the approved list).   The approved list is valid *for 
(number of years) year(s) commencing (date) or until it is terminated by separate notice.  The 
approved list shall be reviewed regularly to ensure that firms who cease to be qualified are 
deleted from the list.  The concerned contractors/suppliers/service providers will be informed 
of the deletion in writing separately. 
 
 
The following criteria and method of assessment are used for the selection of 
qualified contractors/suppliers/service providers for the approved list —   
 
(State the qualification criteria and method of assessment) 
 
Firms interested in providing (a description of goods, services, or categories thereof) and 
meeting the above criteria may apply to and obtain all relevant documents relating to the list 
from (state the name, address and telephone/fax number/e-mail address of the office, and 
other information necessary to contact the office and obtain all relevant documents). 
 

The approved list may be used for procurements covered by the Agreement on 
Government Procurement of the World Trade Organization. 
 

This notice also serves as a summary notice required under the Agreement on 
Government Procurement of the World Trade Organization. 
 
Date 
Name of Head of Department 
 
#  to be amended by the procuring department as appropriate 
 
*   delete if not applicable 
 

 
Appendix III (B) 
 
Specimen Application for Authority to Prequalify Tenderers 
(SPR 330(b)) 
 
RESTRICTED (TENDER) 
 
MEMO 
 
From :  Head of Department 
To :  Chairman, Central Tender Board 
 
 
Contract Title 
Request for Authority to Prequalify Tenderers 
 
A. 
Type and Duration of Contract 
 
B. 
Brief Description of Contract 
 
C. 
Authority to Call for Tenders 
 
D. 
Reasons for Prequalification 
 
E. 
Source of Potential Tenderers 
 
F. 
Method of Selection of Tenderers 
 
 
— 
Essential requirements and marking scheme including assessment criteria, 
weighting attached to each criterion and passing mark(s) for qualification. 
 
 
— 
Number of tenderers to be prequalified. 
 
 
— 
Selection process including membership of selection panel, normally chaired 
by a public officer of D2 rank or above. 
 
 
— 
Relevant parts of the prequalification document pertaining to the method of 
selection of tenderers.  (A specimen format of prequalification document is 
appended.)  
 
G. 
Availability of Funds 
 
 
— 
Approved project estimate (if applicable) 
$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
 
 
— 
Sum allowed for this contract in the approved $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
project estimate (if applicable) 
 
 
— 
Funds in (financial year) Estimates 
$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
(Head . . . . . .  Sub-head . . . . . . ) 
 
 

 
H. 
Declaration of Interest 
 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether public officers involved in preparing prequalification 
documentation (including specifications and marking scheme(s)) have 
declared their interest in accordance with SPR 186, and state, whether or not 
any conflict of interest (actual, potential or perceived) has been identified, and 
if yes, what remedial action has been made. 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether the consultant(s) has/have declared their compliance with the 
relevant terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement on conflict of 
interests and confirmed that there was no actual, potential or perceived conflict 
of interest in connection with their services in the preparation of 
prequalification documents and in the prequalification exercise. 
 
I. 
Name and Telephone Number of Contact Officer 
 
 
— 
Public officer(s) who will answer questions from the tender board or attend 
board meetings for this item, if necessary. 
 
 
 
(                                  ) 
 
Signed by a directorate officer 
 
for Head of Department 
 
 

 
Annex to Appendix III (B) 
 
Specimen Format of Prequalification Document 
 
 
Contract Title 
Contract No.          /Public Works Programme No. 
 
I. 
Information to Applicants 
 
 
— 
State the eligibility for application, method of application, closing time for 
submission of applications and selection criteria for the prequalification 
exercise. 
 
 
— 
State how late submissions, unsuccessful applications, and changes to the 
status and proposals of a prequalified tenderer will be handled. 
 
II. 
Information on Contract 
 
 
— 
State the scope of the contract, tender documentation, tender programme, 
implementation programme, delivery requirements, etc. 
 
III. 
Information Required from Applicants 
 
 
 
 
 
— 
Relevant information, including the applicant’s technical and financial 
capability for assessment purpose. 
 
 
 
 
 

 
Appendix III (C) 
 
Specimen Gazette Notice for Prequalification of Tenderers 
(SPR 330(c)) 
 
G.N. DEPARTMENT 
 
Contract Title 
 
Contract Number              /Public Works Programme Number 
 
NOTICE OF PREQUALIFICATION OF TENDERERS 
 
 
 It is intended to invite tenders in (month and year) from prequalified tenderers 
for (state the name, nature and quantity (or where the quantity is not known, the estimated 
quantity) of the project/services/goods).  *The tenders to be invited will be covered by the 
Agreement on Government Procurement of the World Trade Organization and will not 
involve electronic auction.  *This notice also serves as a summary notice required under the 
Agreement on Government Procurement of the World Trade Organization. 
 

Contractors/suppliers/service providers on the (title(s) of the approved list(s) 
and state a list and brief description of the qualifications/conditions for participation and any 
requirements for specific documents or certifications to be provided by contractors/suppliers/ 
service providers in connection therewith (if such requirements for specific documents or 
certifications are not included in the prequalification documents that are made available to 
contractors/suppliers/service providers)) are invited to apply for prequalification and the 
prequalification documents are obtainable from (state the name, address and telephone/fax 
number/e-mail address of the office, and other information necessary to contact the office and 
obtain the prequalification documents).  Contractors/suppliers/service providers not yet on the 
(title(s) of the approved list(s)) may also apply for prequalification if they submit a request for 
participation by (deadline) to (address) and meet (state a list and brief description of the 
qualifications/conditions for participation and any requirements for specific documents or 
certifications to be provided by contractors/suppliers/service providers in connection 
therewith (if such requirements for specific documents or certifications are not included in the 
prequalification documents that are made available to contractors/suppliers/service 
providers)).  *A sum of $..........., which will not be refunded, is required to cover the cost of 
the prequalification documents. 
 
 
(State the number) of applicants will be selected for tender invitations on the 
basis of the following criteria — 
 
(List of criteria) 
 
 

 
 
Completed prequalification applications shall be submitted not later than (time) 
on (date) to (state name and address of the office/tender board).  If tropical cyclone signal 
No. 8 or above is hoisted, or a black rainstorm warning signal or “extreme conditions after 
super typhoons” announced by the Government is/are in force at any time between (time) and 
(time) on (closing date for receipt of prequalification applications), the closing time will be 
postponed to (time) on the first working day after the tropical cyclone signal No. 8 is lowered, 
or the black rainstorm warning signal or the “extreme conditions after super typhoons” 
announced by the Government has/have ceased to be in force.  In case of blockage of the 
public access to the location of the relevant office/tender board at any time between (time) 
and (time) on (closing date), the Government will announce extension of the closing time 
until further notice.  Following removal of the blockage, the Government will announce the 
extended closing time as soon as practicable.  The above announcements will be made via 
press releases on the website of Information Services Department 
(http://www.info.gov.hk/gia/general/today.htm). 
 
 
*  Joint ventures with other firms will be considered. 
 
 
           The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region reserves the 
right to reject any application and to negotiate with any applicants about the terms of their 
offers. 
 
 
Date 
Name of Head of Department 
 
*  delete if not applicable 
 

 
Appendix III (D) 
 
Specimen Application for Approval of Prequalified Tenderers 
(SPR 330(e)) 
 
RESTRICTED (TENDER) 
 
MEMO 
 
From : Head of Department 
To : Chairman, Central Tender Board 
 
 
Contract Title 
Request for Approval of the Prequalified Tenderers 
 
A. 
Type and Duration of Contract 
 
B. 
Brief Description of Contract 
 
C. Authority 
 
 
— 
Authority to call for tenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
 
 
— 
Authority to prequalify tenderers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
 
D. 
Details of Invitation 
 
 
— 
Dates of Gazette notifications. 
 
 
— 
Dates and media of advertisements or other means of invitation, if any. 
 
 
— 
Any restrictions on applicants, e.g. Approved Contractors for Public Works 
only. 
 
 
— 
Closing date and office for submission of applications. 
 
 
— 
A copy of the prequalification document should be attached for inspection. 
 
E. 
Details of Applications 
 
 
— 
Number of firms obtaining prequalification documents. 
 
 
— 
Number of firms submitting applications. 
 
 
— 
Essential requirements, marking scheme including assessment criteria, 
weighting attached to each criterion, and passing mark(s) required for 
qualification approved by the PS(Tsy) on the advice of the CTB. 
 
 

 
 
— 
Details of assessment of applications : composition of selection panel, method 
of assessment, assessment of specific items by bodies other than the panel, e.g. 
financial assessment by Chief Treasury Accountant of DEVB (Works Branch), 
etc.  
 
F. Recommendation 
 
 
— 
Names of firms recommended for inclusion in the list of prequalified 
tenderers. 
 
 
— 
A summary of the results of assessment showing the relative merits of all 
applicants under each selection criterion and an overall assessment on 
individual applicants as a conclusion. 
 
 
— 
The assessment reports of individual panel members should be attached, where 
necessary, drawing specific attention to any opinion which is contrary to the 
general recommendation. 
 
 
— 
Results of the financial vetting of the prequalified tenderers, if applicable. 
 
G. 
Availability of Funds 
 
 
— 
Approved project estimate, if applicable 
$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
 
 
— 
Sum allowed for this contract in the approved $ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
project estimate, if applicable 
 
 
— 
Funds in (financial year) Estimates 
$ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 
(Head . . . . . .  Sub-head . . . . . . ) 
 
H. 
Declaration of Interest 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether public officers involved in this prequalification exercise have 
declared their interest in accordance with SPR 186, and state, whether or not 
any conflict of interest has been identified, and if yes, what remedial action has 
been made. 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether the consultant(s) has/have declared their compliance with the 
relevant terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement on conflict of 
interests and confirmed that there was no actual, potential or perceived conflict 
of interest in connection with their services in the preparation of 
prequalification documents and in the prequalification exercise.  
 
 
 
I. 
Name and Telephone Number of Contact Officer 
 
 
— 
Public officer(s) who will answer questions from the tender board or attend 
board meetings for this item, if necessary. 
 
 
(                                  ) 
 
Signed by a directorate officer 
 
for Head of Department 
 
 

 
Appendix III (E) 
 
Specimen Gazette Tender Notices 
(SPR 340(a)) 
 
G.N.  
DEPARTMENT 
 
 
It is hereby notified that sealed tenders in *duplicate/triplicate are invited for 
(state the tender reference, name, nature and quantity (or where the quantity is not known, the 
estimated quantity) of the project/services/goods and the time-frame for delivery of 
project/services/goods or the duration of the contract, whichever is applicable, and, where 
applicable, a description of any option). 
 
 
Tenders must be clearly marked with the tender reference and the subject of the 
tender on the outside of the envelope (but should not bear any indication which may relate the 
tender to the tenderer) addressed to the Chairman, (state the name of the tender board to be 
addressed, address of the relevant tender box, and the closing date and time for receipt of 
tenders).  Tenders must be deposited in the tender box as specified in this tender notice 
(“Specified Tender Box”) before the tender closing time. Late tenders or tenders not 
deposited in the Specified Tender Box will not be accepted.  If tropical cyclone signal No. 8 
or above is hoisted, or a black rainstorm warning signal or “extreme conditions after super 
typhoons” announced by the Government is/are in force at any time between (time) and (time) 
on (tender closing date), the tender closing time will be postponed to (time) on the first 
working day after the tropical cyclone signal No. 8 is lowered, or the black rainstorm warning 
signal or the “extreme conditions after super typhoons” announced by the Government 
has/have ceased to be in force.  In case of blockage of the public access to the location of the 
Specified Tender Box at any time between (time) and (time) on (tender closing date), the 
Government will announce extension of the tender closing time until further notice. 
Following removal of the blockage, the Government will announce the extended tender 
closing time as soon as practicable. The above announcements will be made via press releases 
on the website of Information Services Department 
(http://www.info.gov.hk/gia/general/today.htm). 
 
 
Forms of tenders and further particulars are obtainable from (state the name, 
address and telephone/fax number/e-mail address of the office, and other information 
necessary to contact the office and obtain the tender documents).  *A sum of $..........., which 
will not be refunded, is required to cover the cost of the tender documents. 
 
 
*Open tendering is adopted.  All interested contractors/suppliers/service 
providers are invited to tender.  (State a list and brief description of the 
qualifications/conditions for participation and any requirements for specific documents or 
certifications to be provided by contractors/suppliers/service providers in connection 
therewith (if such requirements for specific documents or certifications are not included in the 
tender documents that are made available to contractors/suppliers/service providers).) 
 
 

 
 
*Selective tendering is adopted.  Contractors/suppliers/service providers on the 
(title(s) of the approved list(s) and state a list and brief description of the 
qualifications/conditions for participation and any requirements for specific documents or 
certifications to be provided by contractors/suppliers/service providers in connection 
therewith (if such requirements for specific documents or certifications are not included in the 
tender documents that are made available to contractors/suppliers/service providers)) are 
invited to tender.  Contractors/suppliers/service providers not yet on the (title(s) of the 
approved list(s)) may also submit a tender if they submit a request for participation by 
(deadline) to (address) and meet (state a list and brief description of the 
qualifications/conditions for participation and any requirements for specific documents or 
certifications to be provided by contractors/suppliers/service providers in connection 
therewith) (if such requirements for specific documents or certifications are not included in 
the tender documents that are made available to contractors/suppliers/service providers). 
Contractors/suppliers/service providers will be liable to have their names removed from the 
approved list(s) if they fail or refuse to implement an accepted tender. 
 
 
*Tenderers must attach to each tender a cheque/cashier order/the original copy 
of a receipt for the sum of $........ as a pledge of the bona fides of their tenders, which amount 
shall be forfeited to the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region if any 
tenderer fails or refuses to implement an accepted tender.  The amount will be returned to the 
unsuccessful tenderers without interest. 
 
 
         *This  tender  is  covered  by  the  Agreement  on  Government  Procurement  of  the 
World Trade Organization and will not involve electronic auction.  *This notice also serves as 
a summary notice required under the Agreement on Government Procurement of the World 
Trade Organization. 
 
 
The Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region does not 
bind itself to accept the *lowest/highest (for revenue) tender or any tender, and reserves the 
right to negotiate with any tenderer about the terms of the offer. 
 
 
Details of the award of this contract will be published on the Internet at 
http://www.gld.gov.hk/eng/services_2_c.htm. 
 
 
 
Date 
Name of Head of Department 
 
*  delete as appropriate or if not applicable.    Where a marking scheme is adopted for tender 
evaluation, the reference to “lowest/highest (for revenue) tender” should be changed to 
“tender with the highest overall score”. 
 
 

 
Appendix III (E)1 
 
NOTE TO TENDERERS 
(to be included in tender documents for tenders covered by WTO GPA) 
(SPR 345(c)) 
 
This tender is covered by the Agreement on Government Procurement of the World Trade 
Organization (WTO GPA) and the provisions of the WTO GPA will apply to this tender. 
Tenderers are requested to note that a Review Body on Bid Challenges (under WTO GPA) 
(“the Review Body”) has been set up by the Government to deal with challenges made against 
alleged breaches of the WTO GPA and the relevant procedures for handling bid challenges 
are set out in the Rules of Operation of the Review Body (“the Rules”), which are available 
for inspection at the Secretariat of the Review Body located at the Trade and Industry 
Department or which may be sent to the interested parties upon request.  In the event that a 
tenderer believes that a breach of the WTO GPA has occurred, the supplier may, within ten 
working days after he/she knew or reasonably should have known the basis of the challenge, 
lodge a challenge to the Review Body on the alleged breaches of the WTO GPA. 
Nevertheless, the tenderer is encouraged to seek resolution of its complaint in consultation 
with the procuring department before lodging a complaint to the Review Body.  In such 
instances, the procuring department shall accord impartial and timely consideration to any 
such complaint, in a manner that is not prejudicial to obtaining corrective measures through 
the Review Body. 
 
Tenderers should note that the Review Body may receive and consider a late challenge but a 
challenge shall not be considered if it is filed later than 30 working days after the basis of the 
challenge is known or reasonably should have been known. 
 
 

 
Appendix III (E)2 
 
NOTE TO TENDERERS and CONDITION OF TENDER 
(to be included in tender documents for tenders invited from 
contractors/suppliers/service providers in both the private and public sectors including 
department(s) of the Government of the Hong Kong Special Administrative Region 
whose operation of the services is managed and accounted for by trading funds 
established pursuant to the  
Trading Funds Ordinance, Cap. 430) 
(SPR 345(c)) 
 
 
Note to Tenderers 
 
 
Tenderers should note that tenders are invited from contractors/suppliers/service providers in 
both the private and public sectors including department(s) of the Government of the Hong 
Kong Special Administrative Region whose operation of the services is managed and 
accounted for by trading funds established pursuant to the Trading Funds Ordinance, Cap. 
430 (hereafter referred to as “the relevant trading fund department”). 
 
All tenders will be evaluated on a fair basis.  Every effort has been and will be made by the 
Government to ensure that the relevant trading fund department would not undertake both the 
role of consultant and contractor in this tendering exercise and where appropriate, 
independent consultant has been or will be engaged for the preparation of the tender 
documents, assessment of tenders and subsequent monitoring on the performance of the 
contractor/supplier/service provider. 
 
[Where the Electrical and Mechanical Services Trading Fund may submit a tender.] The 
Electrical and Mechanical Services Trading Fund may submit a tender for this contract. A 
code of conduct for staff of the Electrical and Mechanical Services Department seconded to 
other department(s) is also in place for the staff to observe to avoid conflict of interest and is 
available for inspection by tenderers. 
 
 
 
 
 
************************** 
 

 
 
Condition of Tender 
 
 
Tenderers should note that tenders are invited from contractors/suppliers/service providers in 
both the private and public sectors including department(s) of the Government of the Hong 
Kong Special Administrative Region whose operation of the services is managed and 
accounted for by trading funds established pursuant to the Trading Funds Ordinance, Cap. 
430 (hereafter referred to as “the relevant trading fund department”). 
 
Unless it is in the public interest not to do so, the Government will award the contract to the 
tenderer who has been determined to be fully capable of undertaking the contract and whose 
tender, whether for domestic products or services, or products or services of others, is either 
the lowest tender or the tender which in terms of the specific evaluation criteria set forth in 
this tender documentation is determined to be the most advantageous.  In the situation where 
the tenderer selected in accordance with the foregoing criteria is the relevant trading fund 
department, the Government may, instead of issuing a contract, enter into a service level 
agreement with the relevant trading fund department. 
 
 
 
 
********************************* 
 

 
Appendix III (F) 
 
Guidelines for Drawing up Tender Specifications 
(SPR 254, 280(a), 295(a) and 350(e)) 
 
 
 
These notes provide guidelines for the preparation of tender specifications. 
They supplement any specific instructions given by the body/public officer authorising the 
tender. 
 
User Requirements 
 
2. 
 
A tender specification defines the requirements of the procuring department 
and consequently, what the tenderer is expected to provide.  As a rule, tender specifications 
should meet the basic government procurement policy and principles specified in SPR 106-
109. 
 
3. 
 
Public officers drawing up tender specifications should have regard to the 
following — 
 
 
(a)  specifications form the basis for seeking tenderers’ response and should 
be easily comprehensible.  They should be precise and concise and 
should not render the preparation of bids by tenderers an unduly time-
consuming and costly process; 
 
 
(b)  specifications form the framework for evaluating the suitability of offers 
received from tenderers.  They should be framed in terms that encourage 
open and fair competition by providing potential tenderers an equal 
opportunity to develop solutions capable of satisfying the procuring 
departments’ requirements.  They shall not include any feature which 
could be perceived as discriminatory because it is specific to a 
trademark or trade name, patent, copyright, design, type, origin, 
producer, supplier or brand of product, unless there is no sufficiently 
precise or intelligible way of describing the procurement requirements 
and provided that words such as “or equivalent” are included in the 
tender documentation; 
 
 
(c) 
they should be comprehensive and should contain sufficient information 
for the tenderers to determine the nature, scope and estimated quantity 
or value of goods or services required, their characteristics, standards to 
be met, performance under specified conditions and other relevant 
information in order to obtain conforming and competitive bids; 
 
 

 
 
(d)  departments should guard against over-prescribing requirements. 
Output- or performance-based (rather than input-based) specifications 
should be adopted.  Over-prescription or input-based specifications may 
perpetuate incumbent advantage, inhibiting competition and leading to 
over-reliance on single contractor.  It may reduce the scope for 
innovative responses and exclude some potential tenderers who would 
be capable of meeting the performance levels required in a more cost 
effective manner, depriving Government of the chance to obtain more 
competitive tenders.  It may also require products to be custom designed 
at additional cost rather than making use of goods available in the 
market, hence not conducive to achieving the best value for money for 
Government; and 
 
 
 
 
(e)  to encourage competition and minimise entry barriers (particularly for 
start-ups and SMEs), as a general rule, tenderer’s experience should not 
be set as an essential requirement in non-works procurements, 
irrespective of value.  If it is absolutely necessary, prior approval must 
be sought from the relevant tender board/DTC (for procurements 
adopting marking schemes under tendering procedures) or public 
officers (normally at directorate level) designated by COs (for 
procurements not adopting marking schemes under tendering procedures 
or for procurements under quotation procedures irrespective of the use 
of marking schemes).  The justifications for seeking exception from the 
general rule and the grounds for approval should be properly recorded. 
Where appropriate, tenderer’s experience may be set as an assessment 
criterion in the marking scheme as a desirable feature. 
 
 
 
 
(f)  consideration should be given, as far as possible and where 
economically rational, to avoiding single-use disposal items and 
procuring stores — 
 
 
 
(i)  with improved recyclability, high recycled content, reduced 
packing and greater durability; 
 
 
 
(ii)  with greater energy efficiency; 
 
 
 
(iii)  utilising clean technology and/or clean fuels; 
 
 
 
(iv)  which result in reduced water consumption; 
 
 
 
(v)  which emit fewer irritating or toxic substances during installation 
or use; or 
 
 
 
(vi)  which result in smaller production of toxic substances, or of less 
toxic substance, upon disposal. 
 
4. 
 
In general, there are four categories of specifications — 
 
 (a) 
Functional Specifications 
 
 

 
 
 
These outline the proposed function or role to be performed by the 
goods, services and revenue contracts in helping the end-user to achieve 
the desired outcome.  They focus on what is to be achieved rather than 
how it is to be done. 
 
 (b) 
Performance Specifications 
 
 
 
These detail the required performance characteristics and performance 
parameters by specifying details of operating input or output required, 
but not the method to achieve them or how they should be manufactured 
or provided.  For example, the performance specifications for wire may 
require it to withstand a given temperature, have a designated level of 
resistance to abrasion and have a given level of conductive capability. 
No mention needs to be made of the material to be used or how the wire 
is to be manufactured. 
 
 (c) 
Material Specifications 
 
 
 
These state the physical characteristics of the specific materials to be 
used for manufacturing the goods. 
 
 (d) 
Technical Specifications 
 
 
 
These provide a physical description of the items required, such as size, 
capacity, tolerances and strength.  Technical specifications may include 
detailed plans, designs and technical drawings. 
 
5. 
 
The use of material and/or technical specifications is unavoidable in some 
tenders, particularly where compatibility with existing equipment is required.  However, the 
use of such specifications at the outset might limit innovative solutions or new technologies 
or products which tenderers might be able to offer, and restrict competition.  In preparing 
tender specifications, departments should use functional and performance specifications, 
supplementing them by a material or technical specification only if absolutely necessary. 
Where design or descriptive characteristics are used in the technical specifications, 
departments should indicate, where appropriate, that it will consider tenders of equivalent 
goods or services that can be demonstrated to fulfil the requirements of the procurement by 
including words such as “or equivalent” in the tender documents.  Where dimensions or other 
measurable characteristics are critical to performance, a permitted range rather than a fixed 
dimension should be used wherever possible. 
 
6. 
 
In drawing up specifications, particularly for mission-critical or high-value 
contracts, departments — 
 
 

 
 
(a) 
are encouraged to research the market or conduct non-binding EOI 
exercises for likely sources of supply and other relevant information on 
current features of the goods or services to be procured and 
technological trends.  Market research or EOI may be particularly 
warranted for contracts with poor tender response in the past 
procurement exercise, or for cases where the potential for innovation of 
the procurement needs to be further assessed.  This might occasionally 
involve the department discussing with contractors/suppliers/service 
providers how particular functional and performance requirements can 
best be met; 
 
 
(b)  should use functional and performance requirements in the 
specifications, with a distinction drawn between mandatory and 
desirable features.  Mandatory features are those features that are so 
fundamental or essential to the acceptability of the tender that non-
compliance with any of them will render the tender non-conforming. 
Desirable features are not standards or specifications that must be met 
but normally take the form of assessment criteria in the marking scheme 
and more technical scores will be given if the tenderer can provide more 
desirable features with performance better than the specified level. 
Once accepted, the successful tenderer will be required to incorporate 
the desirable features in providing the stores or services, or in 
performing the revenue contracts;  
 
 
(c) 
should specify in the tender document all the essential requirements as 
well as the consequences that non-compliance with any of the specified 
essential requirements will render the tender non-conforming.  These 
requirements must be made known to the potential bidders in the 
invitation for procurements.  Mandatory features which must be 
proposed and met, requirements which must be complied with and 
documents which must be submitted at the time of tender opening must 
be specified as “essential requirements”.  Given that non-compliance 
with a requirement specified as an “essential requirement” will render 
the tender non-conforming, departments should vigorously assess 
whether a requirement should be specified as an “essential 
requirement”.  Use of separate sealed envelopes for technical and price 
proposals should not be specified as an “essential requirement” since, 
subject to appropriate measures being adopted to ensure the integrity of 
the tender evaluation process, permission of compliance after tender 
opening will neither give rise to manipulation nor affect the outcome of 
the tender evaluation.  Those requirements which can be complied with 
after tender opening should be specified as “requirements”, but not 
“essential requirements”.  To discourage late submission of missing 
documents (such as copies of required documents where the original has 
been submitted, certificates, licences or proof of minimum experience) 
which should be requirements but not essential requirements, 
departments may state in the tender document that failure to comply 
with the requirements may (but not “will”) render the tender non-
conforming.  If in doubt whether a tenderer should be disqualified for 
such failure, advice from the D of J or, in the case of works tenders, 
LAD(W)/DEVB should be sought;  
 
 

 
 
(d)  where departments consider it appropriate to allow tenderers to make 
alternative proposals which could better meet their requirements, should 
include in the tender documents a standard clause that alternative 
proposals will be considered by the Government and may be offered; 
and 
 
 
(e)  should determine the evaluation criteria before inviting tenders and 
include an outline of the evaluation criteria in the tender documents to 
assist tenderers in preparing their tenders.  Where departments consider 
it necessary to evaluate the technical and price aspects of tenders 
separately, including the use of a marking scheme, they should follow 
guidelines set out at Appendix III(G) and adopt a two-envelope 
approach where appropriate. 
 
Other Considerations 
 
7. 
 
Apart from tender specifications, departments, in drawing up the terms and 
conditions for inclusion in tender documents, should have special regard to the following — 
 
 
(a) 
Duration of contract 
 
 
 
Market conditions should be taken into account in determining the 
length of the contract.  Where market developments are characterised by 
the presence of a large number of potential tenderers and rapid 
technological improvements, it may be appropriate to adopt break 
clauses to give flexibility to take advantage of favourable trends and 
avoid being committed to products that may become obsolete quickly. 
When the barriers to enter into the market are high for a tenderer, such 
as the requirement to invest substantially in capital assets, the 
department should consider letting a longer contract in order to generate 
more interest among potential tenderers and to enable them to offer 
more competitive prices. 
 
 (b) 
Price adjustment 
 
 
 
A price adjustment clause may be used where wages, material costs or 
other major determinators of market prices are prone to rapid and 
substantial fluctuation or adjustment.  For non-works contracts of a 
duration of one year or less, it is usually not necessary to provide for a 
price adjustment.  For capital works contracts, provisions for price 
adjustment may be made irrespective of the contract duration. 
 
 (c) 
Payment schedule 
 
 
 
Where applicable, milestone payments related to performance targets 
should be used.  A contract may be divided into several stages and 
payment be made after the completion of a particular stage. 
 
 (d) 
Over-reliance on single contractor 
 
 

 
 
 
In case of re-tender, departments should, in the light of the degree of 
market competition in the past procurement exercises, review and refine 
the tender specifications as well as essential requirements and marking 
scheme with a view to encouraging competition. 
 
 (e) 
Bundling vs splitting into smaller contracts 
 
 
 
While larger contracts created through bundling of say different 
geographical districts or venues may achieve better economy of scale, 
considerations should also be given to whether splitting them up into 
smaller ones will enable more new comers, such as start-ups or SMEs, 
to enter the market and hence more choices for the Government.  In no 
circumstances should a contract be spilt with the intention of totally or 
partially excluding it from the application of the WTO GPA. 
 
 
 
 
(f)   Exclusion of a contractor/supplier/service provider 
 
Departments may consider including a clause to reserve the right for the 
Government to exclude a contractor/supplier/service provider from a 
tender exercise on grounds such as: 
 
(i)  bankruptcy; 
(ii)  false declarations; 
(iii)  significant or persistent deficiencies in performance of any 
substantive requirement or obligation under a prior contract or 
contracts; 
(iv)  final judgements in respect of serious crimes or other serious 
offences; 
(v)  professional misconduct or acts or omissions that adversely reflect 
on the commercial integrity of the contractor/supplier/service 
provider; or 
(vi)  failure to pay taxes. 
 
 

 
Appendix III (G) 
 
Guidelines for Adopting a Marking Scheme for Tender Evaluation 
(SPR 221A, 350(h), 370(c) and 445(d)) 
 
Introduction 
 
 
 
To ensure adequate room will be in place in the tender evaluation process to 
assess innovative suggestions, departments are encouraged to adopt marking schemes. 
Marking schemes should be clear and objective so as to provide a level playing field for 
bidders and encourage innovative suggestions.  In formulating marking schemes, departments 
should bear in mind user-friendliness and ensure that they are commensurate with the nature, 
scale and value of the tender concerned.  
Standard Marking Scheme Framework (SMS Framework) for the procurement of 
stores, services (excluding works contracts) and revenue contracts 
 
2.  
 
The SMS Framework is provided in FC No. 2/2019 (as may be updated from 
time to time).  The SMS Framework sets out the limitations on the use of essential 
requirement(s), the normal range of technical and price weightings, the permitted range of 
marks in respect of different assessment criteria and the guidelines on giving marks and 
setting passing marks, etc.  It is applicable to the procurement of stores, services (excluding 
works contracts) and revenue contracts.  For the avoidance of doubt, if a marking scheme is 
adopted for stores, services (excluding works contracts) and revenue contracts under 
quotation procedures set out in Chapter II, departments should also follow the SMS 
Framework. 
 
3. 
 
Marking schemes formulated according to the SMS Framework do not require 
approval from the relevant tender board/DTC (or directorate officer for adopting marking 
schemes under quotation procedures).  Any deviation from the SMS Framework will be 
subject to the prior approval of the relevant tender board/DTC (or the relevant directorate 
officer for adopting marking schemes under quotation procedures).  Justifications for the 
proposed deviations must be provided and recorded. 
 
4. 
 
Departments are encouraged to adopt marking schemes to assess bidders’ 
proposals for service contracts that rely heavily on the deployment of non-skilled workers.  If 
departments opt to adopt a marking scheme for this type of contract under the tender 
procedures or quotation procedures, the SMS Framework should be followed, unless 
otherwise approved by the relevant tender board/DTC (or the relevant directorate officer for 
adopting marking schemes under quotation procedures).  For this type of contract, 
departments should observe other requirements set out in FC No. 3/2019.  
 
5. 
 
Departments may draw up their own departmental procedures on the 
endorsement of marking schemes to ensure compliance with the SMS Framework.  The 
procedures should be approved by DGL in accordance with SPR 126.  As specified in SPR 
350(a) and SPR 350(h), non-works tenders not adopting marking schemes or setting essential 
requirements on tenderer’s experience for procurement should be approved by public officers 
(normally at directorate level) designated by COs. 
 
 

 
6. 
 
Submission to the relevant tender boards/DTCs (or directorate officers for 
adopting marking schemes under quotation procedures) to approve any deviation from the 
SMS Framework shall include a brief description of the goods or service to be procured, its 
estimated value, tentative tender program, findings of a market research (if any), details of the 
deviations from the SMS Framework and justifications for such deviations, where 
appropriate. 
 
 
Marking Scheme for Works Tenders 
 
7. 
 
For works tenders, departments should follow the provisions in the relevant 
DEVB TC(W) and any subsequent amendments issued by DEVB from time to time in 
deciding whether and how to apply marking schemes for evaluating such tenders. 
 
 
8. 
 
All marking schemes, including deviation from the standard ones (i.e. 
paragraph 9 of the Appendix), have to be approved by the relevant tender boards. 
Submissions to the relevant tender boards on the use of a marking scheme or deviation from 
the approved standard marking scheme shall include a brief description of the scope of works, 
its estimated value, tentative tender program, findings of the market research (if any), 
justifications for the use of the marking scheme, proposed weighting for technical and price 
assessments, assessment criteria and their relative weighting, and passing marks for 
assessment criteria (if any), where appropriate. 
 
Standard Marking Scheme for Individual Procurement 
 
9. 
 
If considered appropriate, departments may seek the approval of the relevant 
tender board/DTC (or the relevant directorate officer for adopting marking schemes under 
quotation procedures) for adoption of a standard marking scheme (including marking 
schemes that deviate from the SMS Framework) for particular types of works or non-works 
contracts.  The standard marking scheme, if approved, may be used in future procurement 
exercises for the same type of contracts. 
 
Design of Marking Schemes for Tender Evaluation 
 
10. 
 
In formulating a marking scheme, the assessment criteria should be drawn up 
in consistent with basic government procurement principles set out in SPRs 106 – 109.  They 
should be able to differentiate the relative merits of tenderers’ technical proposals and obtain 
better value for money for Government.  The assessment criteria should be objective and as 
far as possible quantifiable.  Assessment criteria that may have the effect of favouring 
incumbent contractors should be avoided.  Proposals committed by the recommended 
tenderer under the marking scheme should be incorporated into the contract and enforceable 
by the procuring department as part of contract management.  The enforceability of these 
proposals and the administrative costs involved should hence be taken into account by the 
department in developing the assessment criteria. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
11. 
 
Departments should state in the tender documents the use of a marking scheme 
in tender evaluation with an outline of the evaluation criteria to assist tenderers in preparing 
their tenders.  In line with the basic government procurement principle of transparency, 
departments should provide information including descriptions of assessment criteria and 
their individual technical marks, passing marks set for technical assessment (if any), formula 
to be used to calculate the technical/price scores, technical to price assessment weighting, etc. 
Once the marking scheme is published, departments should adhere to the evaluation basis set 
out in the marking scheme in deciding on the award of contract. 
 
Two-envelope Approach for Submission of Tenders 
 
12. 
 
Since the use of a marking scheme invariably involves a technical evaluation 
conducted separately from the tendered sum comparison, a two-envelope approach should be 
adopted when requiring the tenderers to submit their tenders, i.e. technical and price 
information should be submitted in separate envelopes.  Under the two-envelope approach, 
departments shall ask the tenderers to enclose all the information and documents required for 
price assessment in sealed envelope(s) with the clear indication that it contains the price 
information; and to enclose all the other information including those required for technical 
assessment in separate sealed envelope(s) with the clear indication that it contains the 
technical information.  Normally departments should not open the envelopes containing the 
price information until the completion of technical assessment.  When departments, having 
regard to exceptional circumstances, consider it necessary to open the price envelope(s) prior 
to completion of the technical assessment because of the urgency of the exercise, departments 
should ensure that assessment of the technical and price proposals should be carried out by 
separate teams which should not communicate with each other until after completion of their 
assessment.  The prior approval of the relevant tender board/ DTC (or directorate officer for 
adopting marking schemes under quotation procedures) has to be obtained for any such 
arrangement.  For works contracts, departments should follow the guidelines promulgated in 
relevant DEVB TC(W). 
 
Scoring Methodology for Technical and Price Proposals 
 
13. 
 
Price proposals should only be opened and assessed after completion of the 
technical assessment.  Any exceptional arrangement such as those in paragraph 12 above 
should be fully justified and require the prior approval of the relevant tender board/DTC (or 
the relevant directorate officer under quotation procedures). 
 
14. 
 
TAPs should apply pre-determined weighting given to the technical and price 
assessment.  In normal circumstances, the contractor meeting the essential requirements in 
full and obtaining the highest overall score should be recommended. 
 
15. 
 
The following method should be adopted for calculating the technical and 
price scores in tender evaluation — 
 
 

 
 
 (i) 
Technical 
score 
 
 
 
 
 
Formula : 
Technical mark of the  
tender being assessed    x   Technical weighting 
Highest technical 
mark among the 
conforming tenders 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
  
Example 

 
 
 
 
 
Price to technical weighting 

50 : 50 
 
 
 
Maximum mark for technical assessment in 
 
 
the marking scheme 

100 
 
 
 
Tenderer A obtains 90 marks 
 
(the highest mark of all conforming tenderers) 
 
 
 
 
Tenderer B obtains 60 marks 
 
 
 
 
 
90 
Tenderer A’s technical score : 
x 50  = 50 
  
90 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
60 
Tenderer B’s technical score : 
x 50  = 33.33 
  
90 
 
 
 
 
 
 (ii) 
Price 
score 
 
 
 
  
Formula 

 
 
 
 
 
Lowest tender price 
among the conforming  x  Price weighting 
 tenders  
Tender price of 
 
the tender being assessed 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Example 

 
 
 
 
 
Price to technical weighting 

50 : 50 
 
 
 
Tenderer A’s price proposal 
 
 
(the lowest price of all conforming tenderers) 

$5,000,000 
 
 
 
Tenderer B’s price proposal 
: $6,000,000 
 
 
 
$5,000,000 
Tenderer A’s price score : 
x50 = 
50 
$5,000,000 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
$5,000,000 
Tenderer B’s price score : 
x 50  = 41.67 
$6,000,000 
 

 
Contract Award 
 
16. 
 
When a marking scheme is used to assess tenders, departments shall follow the 
evaluation basis set out in the tender documents to award the contracts for that procurement. 
The tenderer who has submitted a conforming offer with the highest overall score (i.e. the 
sum of price and technical scores) under the marking scheme should normally be awarded the 
contract.  For tenders for service contracts that rely heavily on the deployment of non-skilled 
workers, if two or more tenderers obtain the same overall score after technical and price 
assessments, the tenderer which obtains the highest score in technical assessment should 
normally be awarded the contract.   
 
 

 
Appendix III (G)1 
 
 

Guidelines on Tender Assessment Panels (TAP) 
(SPR 370(a) and 440(c)) 
 
Establishment of TAP 
 
 
 
Departments should normally establish a TAP1 for the evaluation of tenders/ 
consultancy proposals.  A TAP should consist of not less than two persons.  Where necessary, 
departments may set out specific terms of reference for the TAP (e.g. whether the Chairman 
is a marking or non-marking member at the appointment of the TAP, and the role and 
responsibilities of TAP members if not all TAP members will take part in the scoring of a 
particular assessment criterion). 
 
2. 
 
To safeguard the integrity of the procurement exercise, a TAP should comprise 
government officials only.  Departments should ensure that only properly qualified persons 
are appointed to assess the technical submissions.  Where a two-envelope approach is used, 
departments may consider whether separate teams should be set up within the TAP to assess 
technical and price proposals respectively.   
 
3. 
 
Under special circumstances such as handling innovative proposals from 
tenderers, advice may need to be sought from technical experts outside the Government.  In 
determining the need to engage an outside technical expert, the department should explore 
and ascertain whether the expertise is available within the Government, the merits and the 
cost-effectiveness of engaging the outside technical expert.  Outside technical experts may be 
engaged only if the required expertise is not available within the Government.  If it is 
considered necessary to engage an outside technical expert to serve as a technical advisor, 
departments should set out clearly the role of the technical advisor in the procurement process 
and the specific assessment criteria that require advice from him.  The technical advisor may 
be engaged before or after receipt of tenders, to be agreed by the TAP having regard to the 
need of the operation of the TAP.  To enable the technical advisor to render useful advice, he 
may have access to tender information relevant to the assessment criteria that his advice is 
required.  In any case, the technical advisor should not give marks to any assessment criteria 
or have access to price proposals submitted by tenderers. 
 
4. 
 
TAP Chairman and members should observe the requirements laid down in 
Chapter IA of SPR and avoid conflict of interest in government procurement.  TAP Chairman 
and members should declare any actual, potential or perceived conflict of interests as soon as 
they take up the duties and as soon as they become aware of such actual, potential, or 
perceived conflict of interest.  If a technical advisor outside the Government is engaged, 
departments should ensure that sufficient safeguards are in place to avoid conflict of interest 
in the procurement exercise.  In particular, the technical advisor should sign an undertaking to 
confirm, amongst others, the absence of any actual, potential or perceived conflict of interest 
situations in the procurement exercise.  A sample of the undertaking is at Appendix I(C). 
 
                                                 
1   Include both Tender Assessment Panel for tender exercises and Assessment Panel for consultants selection 
exercises. 
 

 
5. 
Declarations/undertakings of TAP members and technical advisor should be 
drawn to the attention of TAP Chairman while the declaration of the TAP Chairman should 
be drawn to the attention of his supervisor.  All such declarations/undertakings and follow-up 
actions taken (if any) must be recorded and filed properly before proceeding to the next stage 
of the tender process/ consultants selection process. 
 
6. 
The membership of the TAP, the declarations/undertakings made by the TAP 
and the technical advisor as well as the specific terms of reference of the TAP (if any) should 
be covered in the submission(s) to the DTC, DCSC, tender board or consultants selection 
board when seeking approval in relation to the marking scheme (if applicable) and for the 
proposed award of the tender / appointment of consulting firm.  The procuring department 
should take into account comments offered by the DTC, DCSC, tender board or consultants 
selection board as appropriate. 
 
Evaluation by TAP 
 
7. 
The assessment criteria adopted in a marking scheme should be objective and 
quantifiable as far as possible.  Where practicable, tender documents / consultancy briefs 
should be drawn up to allow assessment to be made without the TAP knowing the identity of 
the bidders. 
 
8. 
TAP members should be conversant with the assessment criteria.  To facilitate 
the assessment of technical proposals by TAP members on a consistent basis according to the 
pre-determined assessment criteria, the TAP Chairman may arrange briefing for TAP 
members as appropriate before evaluation of tenders / consultancy proposals. 
 
9. 
TAP members should score the technical proposals submitted by tenderers 
individually in accordance with the approved marking scheme.  For non-works procurements, 
in case the procuring department considers that a collective assessment by the full TAP in 
accordance with the marking scheme is necessary, it should seek prior exceptional approval 
from the DTC, DCSC, tender board or consultants selection board (or the relevant directorate 
officer if a marking scheme is used under quotation procedures) before evaluation of 
technical proposals. 
 
10. 
Before proceeding to evaluation, TAP should agree on the mechanism for 
consolidating the marks given by individual TAP members to derive the overall technical 
score for a tenderer.  For example, TAP may take the average mark given by TAP members 
as the overall technical score awarded to a tenderer. 
 
 

 
11. 
To facilitate better understanding of the tender proposals (such as the 
innovative suggestions), TAP may invite the bidders to make a verbal presentation/ 
demonstration after the tender closing date.  Bidders may introduce, explain and clarify their 
tender proposals during the presentation/demonstration.  In no circumstances should 
additional information or new/amended proposal not set out in their tender submissions be 
accepted.  If a technical advisor outside the Government has been engaged, the bidders 
should be informed of the presence of the technical advisor.  Unless the 
presentation/demonstration is an essential requirement set out in tender documents, bidders 
refusing to offer presentation/demonstration should not be disqualified on ground of their 
refusal.  TAP should evaluate the tenders according to the assessment criteria set out in the 
tender documents.  Normally, the presentation/demonstration will not be taken into account 
in marking.  If the presentation/demonstration will be taken into account in the marking as 
pre-determined and specified in the marking scheme and tender documents, TAP should 
ensure that the evaluation of the presentation/demonstration should be based on the tender 
specifications and the pre-determined assessment criteria. 
 
12. 
Normally, TAP members should meet to deliberate the tenders / consultancy 
proposals received.  The TAP Chairman may decide whether the technical advisor outside the 
government should be invited to join the TAP meeting or provide input in writing.  In the 
former case, the outside technical advisor should only take part in the deliberation of the 
areas where his expertise is required.  The TAP Chairman should facilitate deliberation 
amongst TAP members with a view to making recommendations to the DTC, DCSC, tender 
board or consultants selection board.  In case there are substantial differences in marks given 
by individual TAP members according to the marking scheme, the TAP Chairman should 
check whether the assessment was based on the same understanding of the marking scheme 
or the information contained in the tenders/ consultancy proposals received.  This is to ensure 
that evaluation is made on a consistent basis.  If the differences remain after checking, the 
marks given by individual TAP members should be consolidated based on the agreed 
mechanism referred to in paragraph 10 above.  TAP’s deliberations and decision should be 
properly documented. 
 
13. 
A TAP is responsible for making recommendation(s) to the DTC, DCSC, 
tender board or consultants selection board for the tender / consultants selection exercise 
under its purview.  If there is a division of opinion on a contract award between TAP 
members, the differing views should be submitted by the TAP along with TAP’s 
recommendation(s) for review by the DTC, DCSC, tender board or consultants selection 
board. 
 
 

 
 
Appendix III (H) 
 
Guidelines for Financial Vetting of Recommended Tenderers 
for Service Contracts 
(SPR 370(b)(i)) 
 
Introduction 
 
 
 
To safeguard Government’s interest, we have to ensure that a tenderer 
recommended for the award of a service contract of a significant value is, in addition to its 
technical capability, financially capable of completing the contract by conducting financial 
vetting in respect of the recommended tenderer by a public officer of the Treasury Accountant 
grade including a non-civil service contract staff who is performing accounting/financial 
duties. 
 
Applicability 
 
2. 
 
Except for consultancy services and works contracts, these guidelines apply to 
all service contracts of a value exceeding $15 million.  Examples of service contracts include 
contracts for the management and operation of carparks, provision of cleaning services, etc. 
For the purpose of these guidelines, a contract for supply of stores is classified as a service 
contract if the contract requires also the provision of services of a value above $15 million. 
These guidelines should be read together with the Financial Vetting Guidelines published by 
the Treasury (as may be updated from time to time).  Departments may also draw reference to 
these guidelines if financial vetting is considered necessary for revenue contracts. 
 
Financial Vetting 
 
3. 
 
When inviting tenders for a service contract of a value exceeding $15 million, 
departments should include in the tender document the conditions that tenderers have to 
demonstrate their financial capability and/or provide the specified contract deposit before 
they can be considered for the award of the contract.  For contracts where periodic financial 
vetting is required, departments should also stipulate the frequency of the financial vetting in 
the tender document. 
 
4. 
 
For the purpose of financial vetting, departments should require tenderers to 
provide the following information — 
 
 
(a)  audited financial statements of the tenderer, and the audited 
consolidated financial statements of the group if the tenderer is a 
subsidiary of another company, for the past three years.  The financial 
statements shall be prepared on the same basis for each year in 
accordance with accounting principles generally accepted in the 
HKSAR and the requirements of the Companies Ordinance, Cap. 622; 
and 
 
 

 
 
(b)  projected statement of profit and loss and other comprehensive income 
and statement of cash flows of the contract for each contract year and 
pre-operating period (if applicable), and if necessary, of the company 
during the contract period, showing the revenue, operating expenses, 
capital expenditure including the initial investments and the sources of 
finance. 
 
5. 
 
For contracts which require significant working capital for financing its 
operation, such as the management contract for tunnels let by the Transport Department, the 
following information will also be required of the recommended tenderer — 
 
 
(a) 
supporting letter(s) from the tenderer’s banker(s) as to the availability of 
credit facilities and the undrawn balance as at a particular date (shortly 
before the submission of tenders) and/or a commitment in principle to 
provide credit facilities for the contract; and 
 
 
(b)  guarantee by the major shareholder(s) of the tenderer as security for the 
due and faithful performance of the contract, as and when required.  In 
determining the amount of guarantee required, departments should 
consider, inter alia, the additional costs to be incurred by Government in 
the event that the successful tenderer fails to commence operation or 
defaults during the term of the contract. 
 
6. 
 
In assessing the financial capability of a tenderer, departments should establish 
the following of the tenderers — 
 
 
(a) 
the past and projected earning performance; 
 
 
(b)  the financial strength; and 
 
 
(c)  the financial arrangements including the degree of the tenderer’s 
financial commitment to finance the investment and operation of the 
contract. 
 
Departments should refer to the Financial Vetting Guidelines published by the Treasury (as 
may be updated from time to time) for details when conducting financial vetting for service 
contracts. 
 
7. 
 
Tenderers who have passed the financial vetting should be required to pay a 
contract deposit (in the form of cash) or submit a performance bond (in the form of a 
guarantee arranged by a bank, insurance company, or the parent company which has been 
assessed to be financially capable) at 2% of the contract value as an additional protection of 
the Government’s interest.  For tenderers who have failed the financial vetting, or who are 
unable to provide adequate financial information for a meaningful assessment to be conducted 
(e.g. newly established companies), they should be required to pay a contract deposit or 
submit a performance bond at 5% of the contract value for low risk contracts, or 6% for high 
risk contracts. 
 
 

 
8. 
 
The contracts or contract types which are considered to be high risk include, 
without limitation mission-critical, emergency-related or health-related contracts (for 
example, systems that relate to law and order, life and death and social security payments), 
and contract types with high concentration risks (for example, where the lion’s share of 
contracts for like services awarded by the same department is dominated by one or two 
contractors, where there was only one conforming bid in the past two consecutive tender 
exercises, or where the award of a high-value contract will render the successful tenderer 
dominant).  COs or designated directorate officers would be the authority to determine, 
before tender invitation, whether a contract or contract type is high risk and whether a 5% or 
6% contract deposit should be required. 
 
9. 
 
Procuring departments are required to conduct periodic financial vetting for 
contracts of high risk and long duration, with a view to ensuring that the contractor concerned 
remains financially healthy.  As a general guideline, periodic financial vetting should be 
conducted for contracts lasting more than five years at three-year intervals.  If a contractor 
fails the periodic financial vetting, procuring departments should check if any obvious 
irregularities have emerged (such as a drastic or continuous reduction in profitability, working 
capital and/or employed capital, discontinuation of related business operations, increase in 
customer complaints, etc.), and step up monitoring measures where necessary, such as 
conducting regular interviews with employees under the contract to see if their wages are paid 
in a timely manner, expanding the sample size for checking the service records (e.g. 
attendance log books), with a view to detecting early signs of default and taking appropriate 
actions if warranted. 
 
Exception 
 
10. 
 
Where the recommended tenderer has a net worth of 20 times more than the 
value of the contract, the financial vetting procedures described in paragraph 6 above may be 
waived on condition that it has passed the profitability, liquidity and gearing ratio tests. 
Please refer to the Financial Vetting Guidelines published by the Treasury (as may be updated 
from time to time) for details.  Exceptions to the arrangements on financial vetting and 
contract deposit are allowed, but only where the Controlling Officer is personally satisfied 
that the deviation is justified and such decisions are to be recorded. 
 
Tender Report 
 
11.   
In making their recommendation on the award of a service contract, 
departments should confirm in the tender report that financial vetting of the recommended 
tenderer has been carried out based on the information submitted and that the tenderer is 
considered financially capable.  Where financial vetting has not been conducted, the tender 
report should include an explanation as to why this was not undertaken. 
 
12. 
 
In case a contractor fails to complete a service contract because of a financial 
problem, the procuring department should review whether the financial problem should have 
been revealed in the assessment of the financial capability of the contractor at the tendering 
stage and assess the loss to the Government as a result of the contractor’s failure to complete 
the service contract.  The result of the review should be sent to the DAS. 
 

 

 
Appendix III (I) 
 
Standard Tender Report Format 
(SPR 375(a) and 380(e))  
 
(Note : Departments may provide additional information having regard to the 
individual circumstances of their tenders and delete those part(s) in this tender 
report format which is/are not applicable to their tenders.) 

 
RESTRICTED (TENDER) 
 
MEMO 
 
From :  Head of Department/Chairman, To : Chairman, . . . . . . Tender Board/ 
Tender Assessment Panel of 
Departmental Tender Committee 
Procuring Department 
 
 
 
 
Contract Title 
Tender Reference/Contract Number                     
 
A. 
Type and Duration of Contract 
 
 
— 
Example : This is a 3-year service contract at an estimated value of 
HK$26.9 million with provision for price fluctuation adjustment based on 
Consumer Price Index (A). 
 
B. 
Brief Description of Contract 
 
 
— 
For goods or service tenders, give a brief description of the goods or services 
required, user departments, delivery schedule, etc. 
 
 
— 
For revenue tenders, give a brief description of the venue or location, method 
to calculate revenue, etc. 
 
 
 
 
— 
For works tenders, give a brief description of the scope of works and location 
of the project, and state whether the contract is subject to the “pay for safety 
and environment” scheme. 
 
 
 
 
— 
State the importance and sensitivity of the contract and any special tendering 
and contract requirements which have affected the tender recommendation, if 
applicable. 
 
 
— 
Highlight the initiatives that have been incorporated in the tender requirements 
to promote innovation, if any, the major changes in essential requirements, the 
marking scheme used (including deviations from the SMS Framework, if 
applicable), tender requirements and specifications as compared with the 
previous tender exercise, if applicable, and provide reasons for such changes. 
 
 
 

 
 
— 
Provide details of any observations/comments made by the tender board/DTC 
in the previous tender exercise, if applicable, and state how such 
observations/comments have been addressed. 
 
C. 
Authority to Invite Tenders 
 
 
— 
For prequalified, restricted or single tendering, or when parallel tendering is 
adopted  for contracts other than works contracts funded under the Capital 
Works Reserve Fund, quote the approving authority and provide a summary of 
reasons.  When parallel tendering is not adopted for works contracts funded 
under the Capital Works Reserve Fund, quote the approving authority and 
provide a summary of reasons. 
 
 
— 
For selective tendering, state the title(s) of the approved list(s). 
 
 
— 
State whether the tender is subject to WTO GPA. 
 
D. 
Details of Invitation 
 
 
— 
Date(s) and mode(s) (e.g. Gazette, internet, newspaper, etc.) of tender 
invitation. 
 
 
— 
The number of invitations issued (if not by Gazette notification). 
 
 
— 
Closing date (original and extended, where applicable) for receipt of tenders, 
and if extended, the reasons. 
 
 
— 
Date of expiry of validity, and if extended, the revised date of expiry and the 
reasons for extension. 
 
 
— 
Expiry date of patent, if there is a patent. 
 
 
— 
Reasons for delay in submitting the tender report, if applicable. 
 
E. 
Details of Tenders 
 
 
— 
State whether pre-tender market research or non-binding EOI exercise has 
been conducted.  If positive, the tender requirements that have been 
incorporated to promote competition and innovation arising from the market 
research or non-binding EOI exercise. 
 
 
 
 
— 
State the number of tenders received and withdrawn, if any.  If only one or 
very few tenders have been received, state the estimated number of potential 
tenderers, the reasons for the poor tender response (if known) identified in the 
pre-tender market research or non-binding EOI exercise and the measures that 
will be taken to enhance tender participation in future tender exercises. 
 
 

 
 
— 
List the tenderers in the form of a comparative statement showing the tendered 
sums quoted by each tenderer, starting with the lowest for goods or services 
tender or the highest for revenue tender, discrepancies in tenders, etc., 
supplemented by an enclosure if necessary.  If there are corrections to the 
tendered sums, provide details and attach copies of tenderers’ letters 
confirming their willingness to abide by the corrected tendered sums.  List the 
tenders according to the corrected tendered sums alongside the original 
tendered sums. 
 
 
 
F. Tender 
Evaluation 
 
 
— 
State the composition of the TAP and the advice obtained from technical 
advisor outside the Government, if any. 
 
 
— 
State the specific terms of reference of the TAP, if any. 
 
 
— 
State the evaluation criteria and basis of acceptance under the terms of tender, 
and provide a copy of the  marking scheme, and restriction on contract award, 
if applicable.  Give reasons for not using marking schemes, if applicable. 
 
 
— 
Provide details of each stage of the tender evaluation.  Give reasons for not 
considering tenders with non-compliance with tender requirements and 
specifications, supplemented by an enclosure, if necessary. 
 
 
— 
Provide details of innovative suggestions proposed by tenderers and the TAP’s 
assessments, if applicable. 
 
 
 
 
— 
If the tendered sums are very close and there are considerable differences in 
the pricing of individual items or when tenders are considered ‘front-loaded’, 
conduct a discounted cash flow analysis to confirm that the net present values 
of the tendered sums do not change the position of the recommended tenderer. 
If however the position changes after the discounted cash flow analysis, the 
present value of the tendered sums should prevail in determining the ranking 
of tenders.  If there are reasons for not conducting a present value calculation, 
state these reasons.  
 
 
 
 
— 
Confirm that post-tender closing contacts/clarifications with tenderer(s), if 
any, were conducted in accordance with the relevant tender terms and SPR 365 
and explain briefly why such clarifications are required. 
 
 
— 
Provide details and results of any negotiations with tenderer(s) if prior 
approval to conduct tender negotiations has been obtained from the 
appropriate authority. 
 
G. Recommendation 
 
 
— 
State the recommendation on the tender to be accepted. 
 
 
— 
Provide detailed reasons for not recommending acceptance of the lowest 
(highest for revenue contracts) conforming tender, or the tender of the highest 
overall scorer when a marking scheme is used for tender assessment. 
 
 

 
 
— 
Confirm that the tender recommended for acceptance complies with the tender 
terms, conditions and specifications.  If not, state where the tender fails to 
comply and explain. 
 
 
— 
Confirm that the recommended tenderer is suitable for performing the contract 
having regard to its performance records, if any.  For works tenders, check all 
the performance reports of government contracts and relevant Housing 
Authority contracts undertaken by the recommended tenderer during the 
preceding five years and state the total number of these contracts together with 
a summary of any adverse report(s) issued under these contracts.  State the 
reasons why a tender is recommended despite the tenderer has been given 
adverse report(s) for other contract(s).  If the recommendation is a 
controversial one, e.g. if a recommendation is made against the advice of 
consultants or if the lowest (highest for revenue contracts) conforming tender 
or highest overall scorer as appropriate is not recommended for acceptance, 
departments/TAP should comment on the suitability of other tenderers whose 
tenders are nearest to the lowest (highest for revenue contracts) conforming 
tender or highest overall scorers as appropriate so that the relevant tender 
board/DTC may decide on the acceptance without referring the tender report 
back to the department/TAP. 
 
 
— 
State any other special circumstances or important assumptions/considerations 
governing the recommendation, any complaint(s) received relevant to the 
tender exercise and how such complaint(s) has/have been handled. 
 
 
— 
For works tenders, confirm that the recommended tenderer has been 
financially vetted by Chief Treasury Accountant, DEVB (Works Branch), and 
state the vetting result. 
 
 
— 
For service contracts with a value exceeding $15 million, or contracts for 
supply of stores which require also the provision of services of a value 
exceeding $15 million, confirm that the recommended tenderer has been 
financially vetted in accordance with the terms of tender and that the tenderer 
is considered financially capable.  State the vetting result and the amount of 
contract deposit or performance bond, as a percentage of the contract value, 
that is required from the tenderer.  Where financial vetting has not been 
conducted, or where the stipulated percentage under SPR 362(b) is not 
followed, explain why. 
 
 
— 
For revenue contracts, in case financial vetting has been conducted, state the 
vetting result and the amount of contract deposit or performance bond, as a 
percentage of the contract value, that is required from the tenderer. 
 
 
— 
For works tenders, confirm the status of the recommended tenderer on the 
respective approved list(s) of contractors and that the recommended tenderer is 
not suspended from tendering under the provisions of the prevailing 
DEVB TC(W) relating to the employment of illegal workers or having illegal 
workers on sites under its control, site safety, Employment Ordinance, etc.  
 
 

 
 
— 
If special references to a tenderer’s conviction records have been made in the 
report (e.g. as a major consideration for not accepting its tender even though it 
is the lowest conforming tender/highest overall scorer), attach a list of 
convictions for the related offences under the relevant Ordinances and 
summarise the number of such convictions in respect of the concerned tenderer 
during the specified period (as promulgated in relevant FCs, FSTBCM or other 
relevant memoranda issued by FSTB, or concerned DEVB TC(W) issued by 
DEVB which would be updated from time to time) prior to the tender closing 
date. 
 
 
— 
For works tenders, state the aggregate value of the outstanding works of the 
contracts which the recommended tenderer has in hand if the recommended 
tenderer is of probationary status or subject to a financial limit on contract 
values for other reasons, and whether the value of the contract in question 
exceeds the allowed limit. 
 
 
— 
For cancellation of tender exercise, state the reasons, the way forward and the 
legal advice obtained. 
 
 
— 
For tenders subject to WTO GPA, confirm that the requirements of WTO GPA 
have been complied with. 
 
H. 
Comparison with the Estimate and Similar Contracts 
 
 
— 
For works tenders, state the following sums and compare the recommended 
tendered sum with the sum allowed for the contract and the pre-tender 
estimate.  Explain the reasons for any significant difference (i.e. with a 
difference of ±10% or more), where applicable — 
 
 
 
(a) 
Recommended tendered sum : $ 
 
 
 
(b)  Sum allowed for this contract in the approved project estimate 
(month/year of approval) : $ 
 
 
 
(c) 
Pre-tender estimate (month/year of preparation) : $ 
 
 
— 
Explain the basis on which the pre-tender estimate is drawn up. 
 
 
— 
Compare the recommended tendered sum/rates with the pre-tender estimate 
and the award contract sum of the previous contract or those in similar 
contracts (month/year of award), whichever is applicable, and explain the 
difference, where applicable.  If a price comparison cannot be made, this 
should be stated and explained. 
 
 
— 
Compare the recommended tendered sum with the second and third lowest 
(highest for revenue contracts) conforming tenders/highest combined scorers, 
where appropriate. 
 
 

 
 
— 
Confirm with analysis that the recommended tendered sum is fair and 
reasonable, and explain why it is considered realistic to accept the tender if the 
tendered sum is significantly higher or lower than the pre-tender estimate, the 
award contract sum of the previous contract or the sum allowed for the 
contract in the approved project estimate. 
 
I. 
Claims History (for works tenders exceeding $100 million in value only) 
 
 
— 
State the number of performance reports on the recommended tenderer with 
claim attitude marked as unreasonable in the preceding five years.  Confirm 
whether the recommended tenderer has demonstrated a reasonable claim 
attitude, or otherwise, on an overall basis taking account of any reported 
‘claims-conscious’ attitude, frivolous or vexatious claims or unjustified 
pressure on the Government in the manner in which claims were pursued. 
Where there is no record, this should be stated in the report. 
 
J. 
Availability of Funds 
 
 
— 
For works tenders, state the following and confirm whether a revision of the 
approved project estimate will be required, if the tendered sum is greater than 
the sum allowed for the contract — 
 
 
 
(a) 
Recommended tendered sum : $ 
 
 
 
(b) 
Approved project estimate (month/year of approval) : $ 
 
 
 
(c) 
Sum allowed for the contract in the approved project estimate : $ 
 
   (d) 
Funds in (financial year) Estimates under 
Head           /Subhead            : $ 
 
 
— 
For other tenders (except revenue contracts), confirm that funds are available 
and the vote to be charged. 
 
 
— 
For tenders invited before funding is secured, state the expected date of 
obtaining the funding approval. 
 
 
 
K. 
Declaration of Interest 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether public officers involved in preparing tender documentation 
(including tender specifications and marking scheme), assessing tenders and 
conducting negotiations have declared their interest in accordance with 
SPR 186, and state, whether or not any conflict of interest (actual, potential or 
perceived) has been identified, and if yes, what remedial action has been made. 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether the outside technical expert(s), if any, involved in assessing 
tenders have declared their interest in accordance with Appendix III(G)1, and 
state, whether or not any conflict of interest (actual, potential or perceived) has 
been identified, and if yes, what remedial action has been made. 
 
 
 
 

 
 
— 
Confirm whether the consultant(s) has/have declared their compliance with the 
relevant terms and conditions of the Consultancy Agreement on conflict of 
interests and confirmed that there was no actual, potential or perceived conflict 
of interest in connection with their services in the preparation of tender and 
contract documents and in the tender exercise.  
 
 
 
L. 
Name and Telephone Number of Contact Officer 
 
 
— 
Nominate public officer(s) to answer questions from the tender board/DTC or 
attend board/committee meetings for this item, if necessary.  The telephone 
numbers of the nominated officer(s) should be provided. 
 
 
 
(                                   ) 
 
Signed by a directorate officer* 
 
for Head of Department/ 
 
Chairman, TAP of Procuring Department 
 
 
*  Tender reports which are submitted for consideration by CTB and subsidiary tender boards 
should be signed by a directorate officer.  Tender reports which are submitted for 
consideration by DTCs should be signed by the Chairman, TAP of the procuring 
department. 
 

 
Appendix III (J) 
 
Guidelines for Tender and Contract Negotiations 
(SPR 296, 385(n), 455(e) and 525) 
 
 
 
Public officers authorised (under SPR 296, 385, 455(e) or 525) to conduct 
negotiations with tenderers and contractors shall observe the following guidelines when 
preparing for and conducting negotiations with tenderers and contractors — 
 
 
(a)  Be clear about what is intended to be achieved from the negotiation. 
For example, this can be a reduction of tender price, a change to the 
payment terms, removal of a counter-proposal (e.g. restriction of 
liability) from the tenderer or adjustment to the price for additional 
requirements of items or service. 
 
 
(b)  Draw up a checklist of the items to be discussed.  The tenderers and 
contractors participating in the negotiations may be given a copy of this 
checklist so that they know what to discuss and bring the right people to 
the meeting. 
 
 
(c)  Determine what the baseline for negotiation should be and seek prior 
clearance as necessary. 
 
 
(d)  Consider what fall back positions Government would need to adopt in 
case the negotiation fell through and plan ahead, for example, by 
considering the need to extend the contract period of existing contracts, 
cancel the tender exercise, conduct a re-tender exercise, etc. 
 
 
(e)  Keep the negotiation team small and limit the number of staff to those 
who are absolutely essential.  There is no need to match the other party 
in numbers. 
 
 
(f) 
Include a representative from the GLD and/or LAD(W)/DEVB or D of 
J, if necessary.  
 
 
(g)  Hold the negotiation in a government office as a normal practice. 
 
 
(h)  Ensure that the government negotiation team as well as the tenderers 
and contractors participating in the negotiations know who the leader of 
the government negotiation team is, and make sure there is only one. 
 
 
(i) 
Hold a pre-meeting so that members of the government negotiation team 
familiarise themselves with the ground rules and the relative strengths 
and weaknesses of the parties to the negotiation. 
 
 
(j) 
Do not reveal to tenderers and contractors participating in negotiations 
the Government’s baseline unless a deadlock persists after repeated 
rounds of negotiations and the negotiation team is satisfied that the 
disclosure is necessary. 
 
 

 
 
(k)  Do not give tenderers and contractors participating in negotiations 
conditional treatment based on past or future procurements, except for 
those already indicated in the tender document. 
 
 
(l) 
Do not furnish to tenderers and contractors participating in negotiations 
information about other tenderers’ prices or technical proposals. 
 
 
(j) 
Keep proper record of the negotiations for audit purpose. 
 

 
Appendix IV (A) 
 
Specimen Submission for CCSB Stage 1 Approval 
(SPR 440(h)) 
 
RESTRICTED (CONTRACT) 
 
MEMO 
 
From : Head of Department 
To : Chairman, Central Consultants Selection 
Board 
 
 
Title of Consultancy 
 
A. 
Purpose of the Present Submission 
 
 
 
This is a submission for Stage 1 approval to invite consultancy proposals from 
[number]  consulting firms listed in Section G below for the captioned consultancy. 
 
B. 
Brief Description of the Consultancy 
 
C. 
Estimated Duration of the Consultancy 
 
D. 
Estimated Cost of the Consultancy 
 
E. 
Authority to Employ Consultants 
 
 — 
Policy support from the relevant Director of Bureau or a public officer 
 
authorised by him, endorsement of the MA Division of FSTB for financial 
 
consultants2 and EffO for general management consultants3, funding approval, 
 
etc.   
— 
State whether the consultants selection exercise was initiated before funding is 
 
secured (i.e. whether parallel tendering has been adopted). 
— 
For works-related consultancies funded under the Capital Works Reserve 
 
Fund, if parallel tendering has not been adopted, quote the approving authority 
 
and provide a summary of reasons. 
— 
For other consultancies, if parallel tendering has been adopted, quote the 
 
approving authority and provide a summary of reasons. 
                                                 
2  Financial consultants may include, inter alia, accountants, actuaries, merchant bankers or financial 
management consultants and also cover financial consultants to be engaged as sub-consultants to non-financial 
consultancies.  The need for appointing outside financial consultants may be justified by circumstances 
including where the assignment requires special knowledge or expertise not available within the Government 
or the required timeframe, where there is a need for acquiring independent financial appraisals to enhance the 
credibility of the exercise, etc. 
 
3  General management consultants may provide services including advisory, development and operational 
support services concerning — 
(a)  business policy and strategy and the overall planning, organisation, management and control of an 
organisation including management information systems, management audits, etc.; 
(b)  human resources management; and 
(c)  methods for improving productivity, reducing production costs and improving the quality of production. 
  
 
 

 
 
F. 
Details of the Present Submission 
 
 
— 
Provide information on the size and source of the long list, and state whether 
EOIs have been invited. 
 
 
— 
If EOIs have been invited – 
Provide information on the number of consulting firms which have expressed 
interest to participate (with a sample of invitation for EOI), the criteria and 
method used for short-listing consulting firms, the recommended list of 
short-listed consulting firms derived based on the pre-determined criteria and 
method (with reasons for the inclusion of the short-listed firms and the 
rejection of other interested firms from the long list). 
 
 
— 
Attach a copy of the consultancy brief which should have been cleared with 
the D of J and other relevant departments (such as the MA Division of FSTB 
for financial consultancy and EffO for general management consultancy). 
 
 
— 
Provide information on the composition of assessment panel, the specific 
terms of reference of the assessment panel (if any), the marking scheme 
including the weighting for technical and fee assessments, the assessment 
criteria and their relative weighting with passing marks (if any) for assessing 
technical proposals and the method for scoring fee proposals. 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether all public officers involved in the Stage 1 process (including 
formulation of the long list, the short-listing exercise, preparation of the 
consultancy brief, etc.) have declared their interest in accordance with 
SPR 186 and state, whether or not any conflict of interest (actual, potential or 
perceived) has been identified, and if yes, what remedial action has been made. 
 
 
 
 
G. Recommendation 
 
 
— 
If EOIs have been invited – 
Recommend to issue the consultancy brief as approved by CCSB to invite 
consultancy proposals from the short-listed consulting firms. 
 
 
— 
If EOIs have not been invited –  
Recommend to issue the consultancy brief as approved by CCSB to invite 
consultancy proposals from the recommended consulting firms direct. 
 
 
— 
Recommend to assess the consultancy proposals using the marking scheme as 
approved by CCSB. 
 
 
 
H. 
Availability of Funds 
 
                                                                                                                                                         
These exclude public relations services, marketing management services, arbitration and conciliation services, 
financial management services and information technology services. 
 
 
 

 
 
— 
Confirm the availability of funds and the title of the vote to be charged. 
 
 
— 
For initiation of consultants selection exercise before funding is secured, state 
the expected date of obtaining the funding approval. 
 
 
 
 
I. 
Name and Telephone Number of Contact Officer 
 
 
— 
State the name(s)/tel. no(s). of public officer(s) who will attend the CCSB 
meeting to discuss this item. 
 
 
— 
State the name/tel. no. of public officer who can provide further information 
on this submission. 
 
 
 
(                                         ) 
 
Signed by a directorate officer 
 
for Head of Department 
 
 

 
Appendix IV (B) 
 
Specimen Submission for CCSB Stage 2 Approval 
(SPR 445(g)) 
 
RESTRICTED (CONTRACT) 
 
MEMO 
 
From : Head of Department 
To : Chairman, Central Consultants Selection 
Board 
 
 
Title of Consultancy 
 
A. 
Purpose of the Present Submission 
 
 
 
This is a submission for Stage 2 approval to appoint [name of the consulting 
firm] for the captioned consultancy, subject to the fees and terms detailed in the 
negotiating brief in Section G below being resolved satisfactorily. 
 
B. 
Brief Description of the Consultancy 
 
C. 
Estimated Duration of the Consultancy 
 
D. 
Estimated Cost of the Consultancy 
 
E. 
Authority to Employ Consultants 
 
 — 
Policy support, funding approval, CCSB Stage 1 approval, etc.   
— 
State whether the consultants selection exercise was initiated before funding is 
 
secured (i.e. whether parallel tendering has been adopted). 
— 
For works-related consultancies funded under the Capital Works Reserve 
 
Fund, if parallel tendering has not been adopted, quote the approving authority 
 
and provide a summary of reasons. 
— 
For other consultancies, if parallel tendering has been adopted, quote the 
 
approving authority and provide a summary of reasons. 
 
F. 
Details of the Present Submission 
 
 
— 
Provide information on the invitation and receipt of consultancy proposals 
from the consulting firms with a sample of invitation for proposals. 
 
 
— 
State the composition of assessment panel and the specific terms of reference 
of the assessment panel (if any). 
 
 
— 
Describe the assessment process by the assessment panel based on the 
approved marking scheme and assessment criteria, including any verbal 
presentation arranged. 
 
 

 
 
— 
Summarise the results of assessment highlighting the relative merits of the 
consulting firms under each of the assessment criteria and an overall 
assessment of individual firms. 
 
 
— 
Confirm whether members of the assessment panel have declared their interest 
in accordance with SPR 186 and state, whether or not any conflict of interest 
(actual, potential or perceived) has been identified, and if yes, what remedial 
action has been made.  
 
G. Recommendation 
 
 
— 
State the consulting firm being recommended for appointment (with MA 
Division of FSTB and EffO’s advice on the reasonableness of fees and 
payment terms (if any) proposed by the recommended firm in case of financial 
consultancies and general management consultancies respectively). 
 
 
 
 
— 
Negotiate, where applicable, with the recommended firm to resolve items set 
out in a negotiating brief and the expected result for each item. 
 
 
— 
State, where applicable, the next course of action in the event that agreement 
cannot be reached with the recommended firm. 
 
 
 
H. 
Availability of Funds 
 
 
— 
Confirm the availability of funds and the title of the vote to be charged. 
 
 
— 
For initiation of consultants selection exercise before funding is secured, state 
the expected date of obtaining the funding approval. 
 
 
 
I. 
Name and Telephone Number of Contact Officer 
 
 
— 
State the name(s)/tel. no(s). of public officer(s) who will attend the CCSB 
meeting to discuss this item. 
 
 
— 
State the name/tel. no. of public officer who can provide further information 
on this submission. 
 
 
 
(                                        ) 
 
Signed by a directorate officer 
 
for Head of Department 
 
 

 
Appendix V (A) 
 
Guidance Notes on Execution of Contracts 
(SPR 505(c)) 
 
 
 
Corporate bodies are companies incorporated under the Companies Ordinance 
(Cap. 622) or under private incorporation ordinances.  Other bodies, not so incorporated but 
often loosely referred to as companies are, in fact, sole proprietorships or partnerships trading 
under the name of a firm.  A simple distinction between corporate bodies and unincorporated 
bodies is that only the former can use the word "Limited" in their titles and is a separate legal 
entity whilst the latter is merely one or more persons trading together.  The shareholders of a 
corporation cannot be sued individually.  On the other hand, sole proprietors can be sued 
individually and the members of a partnership can be sued individually and severally. 
 
2. 
 
A corporate body will usually execute a contract with its company chop and 
the actual words to be used will be determined by the provisions of the Articles of 
Association or other constitution of that corporate body.  With these qualifications a contract 
will usually end as follows — 
 
 
"Signed by ___[and ___] for and on behalf of [name of the contractor] in the 
presence of ____” 
 
3. 
 
The appropriate persons to sign the contract should be ascertained by 
inspection of the Articles of Association and the resolution of the Board.   
 
 

 
4. 
 
 Where it is necessary or desirable to execute the contract as a deed with the 
use of a common seal (e.g. the contract is not supported by consideration or is to be executed 
as a specialty for the purpose of a longer limitation period), it is no longer compulsory for a 
company to have a common seal.  Where the company does not have a seal or is not using the 
seal, the contract may be treated as being executed under seal if the document is expressed to 
be executed by the company and is signed by two or more directors or by one director and the 
company secretary (or signed by the sole director if the company only has one director).  The 
execution clause without use of a common seal may be worded as follows— 
 
“Executed and delivered as a deed 
) 
by ___________[name of Contractor] 

acting through ___________________ 

, its sole director,/ ________________ 

and _____________, its directors,/ 

__________, its director and ________, 

its company secretary,  in the presence   

of ____________ [name of witness] :   

 
Where the common seal is used, the execution clause may be worded as follows— 
 
“Executed and delivered as a deed and 

the common seal of ________________  ) 
[name of Contractor] was affixed in the 

presence of ______________________,  ) 
its director(s),/___________, its director  ) 
and ________ , its company secretary,/ 

[name(s)] _______, person(s) authorised  ) 
to sign the contract by its board of 

director(s) and in the presence of ______  ) 
[name of witness]: 

 
 
5. 
 
Individuals or partnerships (as distinguished from corporate bodies) may sign a 
contract under hand by the signature of the individual or one or more partners by virtue of the 
provisions of the Partnership Ordinance.  Section 7 of the Ordinance provides that “every 
partner is an agent of the firm and his other partners for the purpose of the business of the 
partnership; and the acts of every partner who does any act for carrying on in the usual way 
business of the kind carried on by the firm of which he is a member bind the firm and his 
partners, unless the partner so acting has in fact no authority to act for the firm in the 
particular matter and the person with whom he is dealing either knows that he has no 
authority or does not know or believe him to be a partner”.  However a partner has no 
authority to execute a document under seal on behalf of the other partners unless specifically 
authorised by them under seal to do so.  Normally all works contracts and bonds to secure the 
due performance of contracts must be executed under seal by the relevant parties.  There is no 
objection to other types of contracts being executed under hand but a bond to secure the due 
performance of a contract must be executed under seal by the contractor and by the financial 
institution which is giving a guarantee.  Accordingly where a contract is to be secured by 
bond, it is preferable that both the contract and the bond should be under seal. 
 
6. 
 
In any case where execution of a contract is by power of attorney, the original 
power of attorney should be produced and a copy thereof retained with the contract. 
 
 

 
7. 
 
In every case the execution of a contract by each party thereto should be 
witnessed by one person (not necessarily the same for each) who should sign his name and 
add his address and his occupation. 
 
8. 
 
In every case where a contract is made with a partnership, the certificate of 
registration under the Business Registration Ordinance should be produced prior to the 
execution of the contract and the particulars of the partners should be checked. 
 
 

 
Appendix V (B) 
Schedule of Authorities for Variation of Contracts 
(SPR 520(c) – (e) and 525) 
 
A.  WORKS CONTRACTS 
 
 
 Approval 
Authority 
Approval limit 
(Public officers) 
I.  Subject to funds being 
(i)  Senior Engineer level or  Up to the limit that the estimated 
available – 
equivalent 
final contract sum, after 
 
 
including all variations under 
(a)  any number of 
 
Items I(a) and (b), would not 
variations (e.g. 
 
exceed the total sum of the 
additional works, 
 
original contract value plus the 
deleted works, design, 
 
contingencies allowed for in 
method), excluding 
 
accordance with the contract 
extension of contract 
 
terms [“total contract value”].  
period, essential for the   
 
completion of works as  (ii)  Directorate level  
Up to the limit that the estimated 
defined in the original 
 
final contract sum, after 
contract; and 
 
including all variations under 
 
 
Items I(a) and (b), would not 
(b)  any additional payment   
exceed the total contract value 
in accordance with the 
 
plus 20% of the original 
terms of the contract 
 
contract value or plus 150% of 
(e.g. price fluctuation 
 
the quotation limit [SPR 
clauses, certified 
 
220(b)], whichever is the 
claims, remeasurement,   
greater. 
arbitration awards). 
(iii)  COs 
 
 
 
no limit 
 
The above schedule of 
 
Variations with individual value 
authorities is subject to the 
 
up to % of quotation limit 
condition that separate approval 
 
[SPR 220(b)] – 
of the public officer on the right 
 
 
hand column is obtained, where 
(i)  Engineer level or 
5% 
necessary, for variations under 
equivalent 
 
Item I(a) – 
 
 
 
(ii)  Senior Engineer level or  20% 
equivalent 
 
 
 
 
(iii)  Directorate level 
100% 
 
 
(iv)  COs 
no limit 
 
 
(Note: For avoidance of doubt, supplementary agreement for additional works approved under 

A.III and A.IV in this Appendix should be treated as a separate contract for the purpose of effecting 
further variations to these additional works and the schedule of authorities for variation of 
contracts under A.I should also be applicable where appropriate) 
 

 
 
A.  WORKS CONTRACTS 
 
 
 
Approval Authority 
Approval limit 
(Public officers) 
II.  Acceptance of an alternative  Directorate level 
Not applicable 
design, method, etc., 
proposed by a contractor 
during the course of works, 
subject to there being no 
additional cost implications 
or no additional works 
outside the terms of the 
original contract. 
 
III.  Additional works outside 
 
Accumulated value of variations 
the terms of the original 
 
under Items III and IV up to 
contract but within the 
 
of quotation limit [SPR 
approved scope of the 
 
220(b)] – 
project, subject to funds 
 
 
being available. 
(i)  Senior Engineer level or  20% 
 
equivalent 
 
IV.  Acceptance of an alternative   
 
design, method etc., 
(ii)  Directorate level 
100% 
proposed by a contractor 
 
 
during the course of works 
(iii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
involving additional cost 
 
 
implications or additional 
works outside the terms of 
the original contract 
provided that the additional 
works are within the 
approved scope of the 
project, subject to funds 
being available. 
 
 
V.  Extension of contract 
 
Accumulated contract value up 
period. 
 
to – 
 
 
 
(i)  Directorate level 
Quotation limit [SPR 220(b)] 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 
 

 
 
B.  CONSULTANCY CONTRACTS 
 Approval 
Authority 
Approval limit 
(Public officers) 
I.  For contracts awarded under departmental authority 
 
(a)  Subject to funds being available, any number of variations other than (b) below, provided that 
the additional services are within the approved consultancy scope and all the relevant factors 
(including rates) are no less favourable 
 
(i)  For contracts awarded 
Directorate level 
Accumulated value of the 
through quotations 
 
contract up to quotation limit 
 
 
[SPR 220(a)] 
 
 
(ii)  For DCSC contracts 
(i)  Directorate  level 
Accumulated value of variations 
 
up to quotation limit [SPR 
 
220(a)], provided that the 
 
accumulated value of the 
 
contract does not exceed 
 
DCSC’s financial limit [SPR 
 
426] 
 
 
(ii)  DCSC 
Accumulated value of the 
contract up to DCSC’s financial 
limit [SPR 426] 
 
(b)  Extension of contract period 
 
(i)  For contracts awarded 
Directorate level 
Accumulated value of the 
through quotations 
 
contract up to quotation limit 
 
 
[SPR 220(a)] 
 
(ii)  For DCSC contracts 
(i)  Directorate level 
Accumulated value of variations 
 
up to quotation limit [SPR 
 
220(a)], provided that the 
 
accumulated value of the 
 
contract does not exceed 
 
DCSC’s financial limit [SPR 
 
426] 
 
 
(ii)  DCSC 
Accumulated value of the 
contract up to DCSC’s financial 
limit [SPR 426] 
 
 

 
 
B.  CONSULTANCY CONTRACTS 
 Approval 

Authority 
Approval limit 
(Public officers) 
II.  For contracts awarded on the advice of the CCSB / AACSB / EACSB 
 
(a)  Subject to funds being 
 
Accumulated value of variations 
available, any number of 
 
up to the quotation limit [SPR 
variations other than (b) 
 
220(a)] or % of the original 
below, provided that the 
 
contract value, whichever is the 
additional services are 
 
greater 
within the approved 
 
 
consultancy scope and all 
(i)  Directorate level 
10% 
the relevant factors 
 
 
(including rates) are no less 
 
 
favourable 
(ii)  COs 
20% 
 
 
 
(b)  Extension of contract period Directorate 
level 
Accumulated value of variations 
 
up to the quotation limit [SPR 
220(a)] 
 
III. Other variations not covered by I and II above 
 
Subject to funds being available,  (i)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit  
and provided that the additional 
(for appointment of 
services are within the approved 
consultants other than 
project scope 
(ii) and (iii) below) 
 
 
(ii)  AACSB 
(for appointment of 
architectural and 
associated consultants) 
 
(iii)  EACSB 
(for appointment of 
engineering and 
associated consultants) 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 

 
C.  SUPPLIES AND SERVICE CONTRACTS (OTHER THAN THOSE UNDER (A) AND (B) 
ABOVE) 
 Approval 
Authority 
Approval limit 
(Public officers) 
I. 
For contracts awarded under departmental authority 
 

(a)  Subject to funds being available, any number of variations provided that all the relevant factors 
(including rates) are no less favourable 
(b)  Extension of contract period 
(i)  For contracts awarded 
Directorate level* 
Accumulated value of the contract 
through quotation 
 
up to quotation limit [SPR 220(a)]  
 
 
(ii)  For DTC contracts 
(i)  Directorate level* 
Accumulated value of the 
 
variations up to quotation limit 
 
[SPR 220(a)], provided that the 
 
accumulated contract value does 
 
not exceed DTC’s financial limit 
 
[SPR 116] 
 
 
(ii)  DTC 
Accumulated value of the contract 
 
up to DTC’s financial limit [SPR 
 
116] 
 
 
(iii) GLD Tender Board (for 
Accumulated value of the contract 
contracts awarded by 
up to GLD Tender Board’s 
GLD only) 
financial limit [SPR 116] 
 
 
(c)  Subject to funds being 
PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
available, variations other 
than those covered by (a) 
and (b) above 
 
II. 
For contracts awarded on the advice of subsidiary tender boards 
 

(a)  Subject to funds being available, any number of variations other than (c) below, provided that all 
the relevant factors (including rates) are no less favourable 
 
 
Accumulated value of the 
 
 
variations up to – 
 
 
 
(i)  For contracts awarded 
(i) 
Directorate level 
25% of the original contract 
by the departments 
 
value or quotation limit [SPR 
itself 
 
220(a)], whichever is the greater 
 
 
 
 
(ii)  COs 
50% of the original contract 
 
 
value 
 
 
(ii)  For contracts awarded 
(i)  GLD officers designated  50% of GLD Tender Board’s 
by GLD 
by DGL 
financial limit [SPR 116] but not 
 
 
exceeding the original contract 
 
value 
(ii)  GLD Tender Board 
 
GLD Tender Board’s financial 
limit [SPR 116] but not exceeding 
the original contract value 
* For contracts awarded by GLD, the approval authority would be GLD officers (directorate or non-
directorate level) as designated by DGL 
 

 
 
(b)  Subject to funds being 
(i)  GLD Tender Board (for 
Accumulated value of the 
available, variations other 
contracts awarded on the  variations up to GLD Tender 
than those covered by (a) 
advice of GLD Tender 
Board’s financial limit [SPR 116] 
and (c) 
Board) 
 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
(c)  Extension of contract period   
Accumulated value of the 
 
 
variations up to – 
 
 
(i)  Directorate level* 
Quotation limit [SPR 220(a)] 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 
III. 
For contracts awarded on the advice of CTB 
 

(a)  Subject to funds being available, any number of variations other than (c), provided that all the 
relevant factors (including rates) are no less favourable 
 
 
 
Accumulated value of the 
 
 
variations up to – 
 
 
 
(i)  For contracts awarded 
(i)  Directorate level 
10% of the original contract 
by the departments 
 
value or $4 million, whichever is 
itself 
 
the greater  
 
(ii)  COs 
 
 
 
30% of the original contract 
 
value or $15 million, whichever is 
 
the greater 
 
(ii)  For contracts awarded 
(i)  GLD officers designated  50% of GLD Tender Board’s 
by GLD 
by DGL 
financial limit [SPR 116] but not 
 
exceeding 30% of the original 
 
contract value 
 
 
(ii)  GLD Tender Board 
30% of the original contract 
 
value 
 
(b)  Subject to funds being 
(i)  GLD Tender Board (for 
Accumulated value of the 
available, variations other 
contracts awarded by 
variations up to GLD Tender 
than those covered by (a) 
GLD only) 
Board’s financial limit [SPR 116]  
and (c) 
 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 
(c)  Extension of contract 
(i)  Directorate level* 
Accumulated value of variations up 
period 
 
to quotation limit [SPR 220(a)] 
 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 
* For contracts awarded by GLD, the approval authority would be GLD officers (directorate or non-
directorate level) as designated by DGL 
 
 
 
 

 

 
 
D.  REVENUE CONTRACTS 
 Approval 
Authority 
Approval limit 
(Public officers) 
I.  For contracts awarded under departmental authority 
 
(a)  Any number of variations other than extension of contract period, provided that all the relevant 
factors (including rates) are no less favourable 
 
(i)  For contracts awarded 
Directorate level* 
Accumulated value of the contract 
through quotation 
 
up to quotation limit [SPR 220(a)] 
 
 
(ii)  For DTC contracts 
(i)  Directorate level* 
Accumulated value of variations up 
 
to quotation limit [SPR 220(a)], 
 
provided that the accumulated 
 
contract value does not exceed 
 
DTC’s financial limit [SPR 116]  
 
 
(ii)  DTC 
Accumulated contract value up to 
 
DTC’s financial limit [SPR 116]  
 
 
(iii) GLD Tender Board (for 
Accumulated contract value up to 
contracts awarded by 
GLD Tender Board’s financial 
GLD only) 
limit  
 
 
(b)  To approve variations other 
PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
than those covered by (a) 
above 
 
II.  For contracts awarded on the advice of GLD Tender Board / CTB 
 
(a)  For contracts awarded by 
 
Accumulated value of variations up 
GLD, any number of 
 
to % of GLD Tender Board’s 
variations excluding 
 
financial limit [SPR 116] but not 
extension of contract period, 
 
exceeding the original contract 
provided that all the 
 
value  
relevant factors, including 
 
 
rates, are no less favourable  (i) GLD officers designated 
50% 
 
by DGL 
 
 
 
(ii)  GLD Tender Board 
100% 
 
 
(iii) PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 
(b)  Variations other than those 
PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
covered by (a) above 
* For contracts awarded by GLD, the approval authority would be GLD officers (directorate or non-
directorate level) as designated by DGL 
 
 

 

 
E.  EXTRA-CONTRACTURAL SETTLEMENT OF CLAIMS 
 
Contract Types 
Approval Authority 
Approval limit 
I. 
Extra-contractual settlement of claims involving payment by the Government 
To approve, on the 
(a) Works 
(i)  COs or designated 
Accumulated value of 
advice of D of J or 
contracts 
officers at 
such payments up to 
LAD(W)/DEVB 
directorate level 
quotation limit [SPR 
where appropriate, 
 
220(b)] 
payment of a claim 
 
 
which is not certified 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
and is not the subject 
 
of an arbitration 
(b) Consultancy  (i)  COs or designated 
Accumulated value of 
award or an award of 
contracts 
officers at 
such payments up to 
the court, subject to 
directorate level 
quotation limit [SPR 
funds being available 
 
220(a)] 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 (c) Supplies and  (i)  For contracts 
 
service 
awarded by the 
 
contracts 
department itself 
 
(not covered   
 
by (a) and 
(i) COs 
or 
Accumulated value of 
(b) above) 
designated 
claims up to quotation 
and revenue 
officers at 
limit [SPR 220(a)] 
contracts 
directorate level   
 
 
 
(ii) PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
 
(ii) For contracts 
 
awarded by GLD 
 
 
 
(i)  GLD directorate  Accumulated value of 
officers 
claims up to quotation 
designated by 
limit [SPR 220(a)] 
DGL 
 
 
 
(ii)  PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
 
II.  Extra-contractual settlement of claims involving acceptance of payment from the 
contractor 
To approve, on the advice of D of J or 
PS(Tsy) 
no limit 
LAD(W)/DEVB where appropriate, 
acceptance of payment of a claim which 
is not certified and is not the subject of 
an arbitration award or an award of the 
court. 
 
 
 

 
Appendix V (C) 
 
Guidelines for Monitoring Performance of Consultants 
Appointed under the Central Consultants Selection Board Procedures 
(SPR 540) 
 
  Procuring 
departments 
should 
closely 
monitor the performance of consultants 
to ensure that their services meet the requirements set out in the consultancy brief and 
agreement.  They should evaluate the performance of their consultants at the intervals as set 
out in SPR 536.  Performance reports on consultants shall be completed by a public officer at 
or above senior professional level on GF 562 and forwarded to the Secretary, CCSB no later 
than six weeks after they are due.  The procuring department should copy the performance 
report to other departments (if any) involved in selecting the consultant for the consultancy 
study. 
 
2. 
 
As soon as it becomes apparent that any aspect of the consultant’s performance 
is not satisfactory, the procuring department should take steps as set out in SPR 537.  In 
addition, the procuring department should state in the performance report to CCSB the action 
taken to inform the consultant that his performance is considered unsatisfactory in a particular 
aspect(s) and the response from the consultant.  The procuring department should also 
summarise any correspondence exchanged and discussions that have taken place with the 
consultant.  The procuring department should not give an unsatisfactory rating in the report 
unless the consultant has been informed of his unsatisfactory performance in the aspect 
concerned. 
 
3. 
 
When the performance of the consultant continues to be unsatisfactory 
notwithstanding his being so advised in writing, the procuring department should take further 
steps as set out in SPR 538, and put the consultant on a three-monthly reporting system. 
 
4. 
 
CCSB may consider suspending a consultant from bidding Government’s new 
consultancy agreements up to a period of 12 months.  The suspension may apply to — 
 
 
(a) 
consultancy studies in a field relating to the consultancy study for which 
the consultant has received three adverse reports over a period of two 
years; or 
 
 
(b)  consultancy studies in the same field for which the consultant has 
received three adverse reports over a period of two years or if the 
department has made a specific recommendation that the consultant is 
not suitable for similar future studies; or 
 
 
(c)  consultancy studies in any field if the consultant has received four 
adverse reports in studies in different fields over a period of 12 months. 
 
5. 
 
An adverse report mentioned in paragraph 4 refers to a performance report 
with an overall grading of “unsatisfactory”.  Six-monthly and three-monthly interim reports 
carry the same weighting as full performance reports. 
 
 

 
6. 
 
Before considering whether to recommend to CCSB to suspend a consultant 
from bidding new consultancy agreements, the procuring department should invite the 
consultant to make representations. CCSB will then take into account recommendation by the 
procuring department, explanations or representations made by the consultant in response to 
the proposed suspension by the Government, and mitigating circumstances, if any.  The 
procuring department should inform the consultant of CCSB’s decision promptly upon 
notification by Secretary, CCSB. 
 
7. 
 
If the consultant’s performance on an assignment continues to be 
unsatisfactory after having been suspended from bidding under paragraph 4 above, CCSB 
may consider deleting the consultant from the long list.  Before doing so, the procuring 
department should invite the consultant to make representations.  CCSB will then take into 
account recommendations by the procuring department, explanations or representations made 
by the consultant on the proposed delisting and mitigating circumstances, if any.  The 
procuring department should notify the consultant of CCSB’s decision promptly upon 
notification by Secretary, CCSB. 
 
8. 
 
Departments should ensure that payment to consultants should only be made in 
accordance with the terms of the relevant consultancy agreement.  Where the payment 
schedule is based on milestone payments related to deliverables/performance targets, the 
department must be satisfied that the deliverables/performance targets required for a 
particular stage have been completed to Government’s satisfaction before payment for that 
stage is made to the consultants. 
 
 

 
Appendix VI 
 
Guidelines for Keeping Stores Records and Issuing Stores 
(SPR 680 and 850) 
 
Registers 
 
  
 
For proper control of stores, departments should maintain the following 
registers –  
 
 
(a)  Register of serially numbered and controlled form (GF 298) – for 
recording receipts, issues and disposal of books of stores vouchers and 
controlled numbered stores forms.  Separate folios should be used for 
each type of book.  
 
 
(b)  Claims register (GF 207) – for recording details of imported goods 
which are short-delivered, damaged, or in any other aspect not in 
compliance with the contract. 
 
 
(c)  Loan Register – for recording details of departmental stores issued on
loan. 
 
 
(d)  Surprise inspection book (GF 235) - for recording results of surprise 
inspections.  
 
 
Issue of Stores for Government Works or Services 
 
2. 
 
Departments may issue government stores on a first-in-first-out basis to public 
officers for use in government works or services.  The public officer receiving the stores 
should sign on one of the following forms — 
 
 (a) 
if the stores are delivered to the public officer by the suppliers direct — 
 
 
 
on a Departmental Order for Supply of Stores (GF 219) in respect of 
stores purchased through GLD or by the department concerned under its 
delegated authority; or 
 
 (b) 
if the stores are issued from a departmental store unit — 
 
 
 
(i)  on a Departmental Combined Requisition and Issue Voucher 
(GF 277) in respect of inventory items or non-inventory items 
which are not regularly required in fairly large quantities; or 
 
 
 
(ii)  on a Non-inventory Stores Consolidated Issue Voucher (GF 283) 
for non-inventory items which are issued in accordance with a 
Working Stores Table maintained by DSM; or 
 
 
 
(iii)  in Column 7 of the Non-inventory Stores Ledger (GF 291) for 
non-inventory items which are not regularly required in fairly 
large quantities; or 
 
 

 
 
(c)  on a computerised stores voucher if the department concerned has 
computerised its stock records and stores vouchers. 
 
3. 
 
The voucher and the relevant job numbers, where the latter are maintained, 
should be cross-referenced. 
 
Issue of Stores for Conversion 
 
4. 
If a department wishes to convert stores which have already been taken on 
charge into items of different specifications or units, e.g. the issue of cloth for making 
uniform, the public officer receiving the stores for the purpose should sign on a Stores 
Conversion Voucher (GF 227). 
 
Issue of Stores for Transfer between Depots 
 
5. 
 
For the transfer of stores from one departmental depot to another, the receiving 
officer should sign on a Departmental Combined Requisition and Issue Voucher (GF 277). 
 
Issue of Stores in Exchange for Unserviceable Items 
 
6. 
 
When stores that are held on charge and recorded in an Inventory Ledger Sheet 
(GF 270) have become unserviceable, they need to be returned to a departmental store unit 
pending examination by the departmental disposal authority.  In exchange for these 
unserviceable items, departments may issue new stores to the users and require the receiving 
officer to sign on one of the following forms — 
 
 
(a)  an Exchange Voucher for Store on Inventory Charge (GF 275) for 
non-uniform items; or 
 
 
(b)  a Counter Record of Issues/Returns of Uniforms and Accoutrements 
(GF 292) for uniform items. 
 
Issue of Stores for Sale 
 
7. 
 
Departments may issue surplus stores, serviceable or otherwise, for sale by the 
disposal term contracts arranged by the GLD and commercial disposal under SPR 1145 after 
receipt of payment and shall require the purchaser or his representative to sign on a GF 277. 
 
Issue of Stores on Transfer to Other Departments or for Donation, Destruction or 
Dumping 
 
8. 
 
Departments may transfer stores to other departments or arrange for donation, 
destruction or dumping in accordance with the procedures set out in Chapters XI and XII.  In 
all cases, GF 277 must be completed and shall state clearly the approval reference. 
 
 

 
Appendix VII 
 
List of Stores for Dumping 
(SPR 1155 and 1200(b)) 
 
Department : 
 
 
File Reference 
:   
 
DDC Reference 
:   
 
 
 
In accordance with the recommendations of the Departmental Disposal Committee, I certify 
that the stores listed below have been destroyed or dumped. 
 
Item No. 
Description 
Unit 
Quantity 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Prepared by 
 
 
Signature : 
 
 
Name : 
 
 
Designation : 
 
 
Date : 
 
 
 
 
Original  -  To be retained by the department which implements the recommended disposal 
method 
Copies  -  To Director of Government Logistics and Director of Audit 
 
 

 
 
Glossary 
 
 
AACSB 
: Architectural and Associated Consultants Selection Board 
 
 CCGO 
: Central Cyber Government Office 
 
 
CCSB 
: Central Consultants Selection Board 
 
 CO 

Controlling 
Officer 
 
 
CTB 
: Central Tender Board 
 
 
D of A 
: Director of Audit 
 
 
DAS 
: Director of Accounting Services 
 
 
DCSC 
: Departmental consultants selection committee 
 
 
DDA 
: Departmental disposal authority 
 
 
DDC 
: Departmental disposal committee 
 
 DEVB 

Development 
Bureau 
 
 
DEVB TC(W) 
: Development Bureau Technical Circular (Works) 
 
 
DGL 
: Director of Government Logistics 
 
 
D of J 
: Department of Justice 
 
 
DSM 
: Departmental Stores Manager 
 
 
DTC 
: Departmental tender committee 
 
 
EACSB 
: Engineering and Associated Consultants Selection Board 
 
 EDB 

Education 
Bureau 
 
 
   
 EffO 

Efficiency 
Office 
 
 
   
 
EMSD 
: Electrical and Mechanical Services Department 
 
 
EOI 
: Expression of interest 
 
 
 
   
 FC 

Financial 
Circular 
 
 
FSTB 
: Financial Services and the Treasury Bureau (The Treasury 
Branch) 
 
 

 
 
FSTBCM 

Financial Services and the Treasury Bureau Circular 
Memoranda 
 
 
GLD 
: Government Logistics Department 
 
 
HKSAR 
: Hong Kong Special Administrative Region 
 
 
LAD(W)/DEVB 
: Legal Advisory Division (Works) of the Development Bureau 
 
 
MA Division 
: Management Accounting Division of the Financial Services and 
the Treasury Bureau (The Treasury Branch) 
 
 
PS(Tsy) 
: Permanent Secretary for Financial Services and the Treasury 
(Treasury) 
 
 
SFST 
: Secretary for Financial Services and the Treasury 
 
 
SMEs 
: Small and Medium-sized Enterprises 
 
 
   
 
SMS Framework 
: Standard Marking Scheme Framework 
 
 
   
 
SPRs 
: Stores and Procurement Regulations 
 
 
TAP 
: Tender assessment panel 
 
 
WTO GPA 
: Agreement on Government Procurement of the World Trade 
Organization